HMManual

Hydromax Windows Version 15

User Manual

© Formation Design Systems Pty Ltd 1984 - 2009

License and Copyright Hydromax Program © 1985-2009 Formation Design Systems. Hydromax is copyrighted and all rights are reserved. The license for use is granted to the purchaser by Formation Design Systems as a single user license and does not permit the program to be used on more than one machine at one time. Copying of the program to other media is permitted for back-up purposes as long as all copies remain in the possession of the purchaser. Hydromax User Manual © 2009 Formation Design Systems. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form or by any means, without the written permission of Formation Design Systems. Formation Design Systems reserves the right to revise this publication from time to time and to make changes to the contents without obligation to notify any person or organization of such changes. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY Neither Formation Design Systems, nor the author of this program and documentation are liable or responsible to the purchaser or user for loss or damage caused, or alleged to be caused, directly or indirectly by the software and its attendant documentation, including (but not limited to) interruption on service, loss of business, or anticipatory profits. No Formation Design Systems‟ distributor, agent, or employee is authorized to make any modification, extension, or addition to this warranty.

iii

Contents

Contents License and Copyright...................................................................................................... iii Contents .............................................................................................................................. v About this Manual .............................................................................................................. 1 Chapter 1 Introduction........................................................................................................ 3 Input Model .............................................................................................................. 3 Analysis Types ......................................................................................................... 4 Analysis Settings ...................................................................................................... 4 Environment Options ............................................................................................... 4 Stability Criteria ....................................................................................................... 5 Output....................................................................................................................... 5 Chapter 2 Quickstart ........................................................................................................... 7 Upright Hydrostatics Quickstart .............................................................................. 7 Large Angle Stability Quickstart ............................................................................. 8 Equilibrium Condition Quickstart ............................................................................ 9 Specified Condition Quickstart .............................................................................. 10 KN Values Quickstart ............................................................................................ 10 Limiting KG Quickstart ......................................................................................... 11 Floodable Length Quickstart .................................................................................. 12 Longitudinal Strength Quickstart ........................................................................... 13 Tank Calibrations Quickstart ................................................................................. 13 Probabilistic Damage Quickstart............................................................................ 14 Chapter 3 Using Hydromax .............................................................................................. 15 Getting Started ....................................................................................................... 15 Installing Hydromax .................................................................................... 15 Starting Hydromax ....................................................................................... 15 Hydromax Model ................................................................................................... 16 Preparing a Design in Maxsurf .................................................................... 17 Opening a New Design ................................................................................ 20 Opening an Existing Hydromax Design File ............................................... 21 Effect of Zero Point change ......................................................................... 23 Updating the Hydromax Model ................................................................... 25 Hydromax Sections Forming ....................................................................... 26 Checking the Hydromax model ................................................................... 29 Setting Initial Conditions ............................................................................. 31 Working with Loadcases.............................................................................. 35 Modelling Compartments ............................................................................ 48 Tank sections ............................................................................................... 58 Forming Compartments ............................................................................... 59 Compartment Types ..................................................................................... 65 Sounding Pipes ............................................................................................ 66 Damage Case Definition .............................................................................. 68 Key Points (e.g. Down Flooding Points) ..................................................... 71 Margin Line Points ...................................................................................... 73 Modulus Points and Allowable Shears and Moments ................................. 73 Floodable Length Bulkheads ....................................................................... 74 Stability Criteria........................................................................................... 74 Analysis Types ....................................................................................................... 74 Upright Hydrostatics .................................................................................... 75 Large Angle Stability ................................................................................... 77 Equilibrium Analysis ................................................................................... 84 Specified Conditions .................................................................................... 87 v

Contents

KN Values Analysis..................................................................................... 89 Limiting KG................................................................................................. 92 Limiting KG for damage conditions with initially loaded tanks.................. 95 Floodable Length ......................................................................................... 99 Longitudinal Strength ................................................................................ 102 Tank Calibrations ....................................................................................... 104 Probabilistic Damage ................................................................................. 107 Starting and Stopping Analyses ................................................................. 127 Batch Analysis ........................................................................................... 128 Analysis Settings .................................................................................................. 130 Heel ............................................................................................................ 131 Trim ........................................................................................................... 132 Draft ........................................................................................................... 134 Displacement ............................................................................................. 134 Specified Conditions .................................................................................. 135 Permeability ............................................................................................... 135 Tolerances .................................................................................................. 135 Analysis Environment Options ............................................................................ 137 Fluids Analysis Methods ........................................................................... 137 Density of Fluids........................................................................................ 140 Waveform .................................................................................................. 141 Grounding .................................................................................................. 143 Stability Criteria......................................................................................... 144 Damage ...................................................................................................... 144 Analysis Output.................................................................................................... 144 Reporting ................................................................................................... 145 Copying & Printing.................................................................................... 147 Select View from Analysis Data ................................................................ 148 Saving the Hydromax Design .................................................................... 149 Exporting ................................................................................................... 150 Chapter 4 Stability Criteria ............................................................................................. 153 Criteria Concepts.................................................................................................. 153 Criteria List Overview ............................................................................... 153 Types of criteria ......................................................................................... 156 Criteria Procedures ............................................................................................... 157 Starting the Criteria dialog ......................................................................... 157 Resizing the Criteria dialog ....................................................................... 158 Working with Criteria ................................................................................ 158 Editing Criteria .......................................................................................... 160 Working with Criteria Libraries................................................................. 162 Criteria Results ..................................................................................................... 164 Criteria Results Table ................................................................................ 164 Report and Batch Processing ..................................................................... 166 Nomenclature ....................................................................................................... 166 Definitions of GZ curve features ............................................................... 166 Glossary ..................................................................................................... 169 Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference ..................................................................................... 171 Windows .............................................................................................................. 171 Assembly View and Property Sheet .......................................................... 171 View Window ............................................................................................ 171 Loadcase Window...................................................................................... 173 Damage Window ....................................................................................... 173 Input Window ............................................................................................ 174

vi

Contents

Results Window ......................................................................................... 175 Graph Window........................................................................................... 178 Report Window .......................................................................................... 181 Toolbars ............................................................................................................... 184 File Toolbar................................................................................................ 184 Edit Toolbar ............................................................................................... 184 View Toolbar ............................................................................................. 184 Analysis Toolbar ........................................................................................ 185 Window Toolbar ........................................................................................ 185 Design Grid Toolbar .................................................................................. 185 Visibility Toolbar ....................................................................................... 185 Edge VIsibility Toolbar ............................................................................. 186 Render Toolbar .......................................................................................... 186 Report Toolbar ........................................................................................... 186 View (extended) Toolbar ........................................................................... 186 Design Grid Toolbar .................................................................................. 186 Extra Buttons ToolbarToolbar ................................................................... 186 Menus ................................................................................................................... 187 File Menu ................................................................................................... 187 Edit Menu .................................................................................................. 189 View Menu ................................................................................................ 191 Case Menu ................................................................................................. 193 Analysis Menu ........................................................................................... 193 Display Menu............................................................................................. 196 Data Menu.................................................................................................. 200 Window Menu ........................................................................................... 200 Help Menu ................................................................................................. 201 Appendix A: Calculation of Form Parameters ............................................................... 202 Definition and calculation of form parameters .................................................... 202 Measurement Reference Frames ................................................................ 202 Nomenclature ............................................................................................. 204 Coefficient parameters ............................................................................... 204 Length ........................................................................................................ 205 Beam .......................................................................................................... 206 Draft ........................................................................................................... 207 Midship and Max Area Sections ................................................................ 208 Block Coefficient ....................................................................................... 209 Section Area Coefficient ............................................................................ 209 Prismatic Coefficient ................................................................................. 209 Waterplane Area Coefficient ..................................................................... 210 LCG and LCB ............................................................................................ 210 Trim angle .................................................................................................. 211 Maximum deck inclination ........................................................................ 211 Immersion .................................................................................................. 211 MTc or MTi ............................................................................................... 211 RM at 1 deg................................................................................................ 212 Potential for errors in hydrostatic calculations ..................................................... 212 Integration of wetted surface area .............................................................. 212 Reference Designs................................................................................................ 213 Reference Calculations......................................................................................... 214 Appendix B: Criteria file format .................................................................................... 216 Appendix C: Criteria Help.............................................................................................. 218 Parent calculations ............................................................................................... 218

vii

Contents

Selecting a calculation in a criterion .......................................................... 218 Angle calculators ....................................................................................... 218 Parent Heeling Arms ............................................................................................ 219 Heeling Arm Definition ............................................................................. 220 Parent Heeling Moments ........................................................................... 226 Parent Stability Criteria ........................................................................................ 228 Criteria at Equilibrium ............................................................................... 228 GZ Curve Criteria (non-heeling arm) ........................................................ 230 Heeling arm criteria (xRef) ........................................................................ 246 Heeling arm criteria ................................................................................... 247 Multiple heeling arm criteria ..................................................................... 259 Heeling arm, combined criteria.................................................................. 265 Derived heeling arm criteria ...................................................................... 268 Other combined criteria ............................................................................. 272 Specific stand alone heeling arm criteria ................................................... 273 Stand alone heeling arm criteria ................................................................ 274 Stand alone heeling arm combined criteria ................................................ 274 Appendix D: Specific Criteria ........................................................................................ 277 Dynamic stability criteria ..................................................................................... 277 Capsizing moment ..................................................................................... 277 Heeling arms for specific criteria - Note on unit conversion ............................... 279 IMO Code on Intact Stability A.749(18) amended to MSC.75(69)........... 279 IMO HSC Code MSC.36(63) .................................................................... 281 USL code (Australia) ................................................................................. 283 ISO 12217-1:2002(E) ................................................................................ 284 ISO 12217: Small craft – stability and buoyancy assessment and categorisation. ............................................................................................ 286 Appendix E: Reference Tables ....................................................................................... 289 File Extension Reference Table ........................................................................... 289 Analysis settings reference table .......................................................................... 290 Index ............................................................................................................................... 291

viii

About this Manual

About this Manual This manual describes how to use Hydromax to perform hydrostatic and stability analyses on your Maxsurf design. Chapter 1 Introduction Contains a description of Hydromax functionality and its interface to Maxsurf Chapter 2 Quickstart Gives a quick walk through the analysis tools available in Hydromax. Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Explains how to use Hydromax' powerful floatation and hydrostatic analysis routines to best advantage. Chapter 4 Stability Criteria Gives details of the stability criteria that may be evaluated with Hydromax. Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference Gives details of Hydromax' windows and each of Hydromax' menu commands. If you are unfamiliar with Microsoft Windows® interface, please read the owner's manual supplied with your computer. This will introduce you to commonly used terms and the basic techniques for using any computer program.

Page 1

Chapter 1 Introduction

Chapter 1 Introduction Hydromax is a hydrostatics, stability and longitudinal strength program specifically designed to work with Maxsurf. Hydromax adds extra information to the Maxsurf surface model. This includes: compartments and key points such as downflooding points and margin line. Hydromax‟ analysis tools enable a wide range of hydrostatic and stability characteristics to be determined for your Maxsurf design. A number of environmental setting options and modifiers add further analysis capabilities to Hydromax. Hydromax is designed in a logical manner, which makes it easy to use. The following steps are followed when performing an analysis: Input model Analysis type selection Analysis settings Environment options Criteria specification and selection Run analysis Output

Hydromax operates in the same graphical environment as Maxsurf; the model can be displayed using hull contour lines, rendering or transparent rendering. This allows visual checking of compartments and shows the orientation of the vessel during analysis.

Input Model Maxsurf design files may be opened directly into Hydromax, eliminating the need for time-consuming digitising of drawings or hand typing of offsets. This direct transfer preserves the three-dimensional accuracy of the Maxsurf model. Tanks can be defined and calibrated for capacity, centre of gravity and free surface moment. Tanks and compartments can be flooded for the purpose of calculating the effects of damage. A number of loadcases can be created. The loadcase allows static weights and tankfillings to be specified and calculates the corresponding weights and centres of gravity as well as the total weight and centre of gravity of the vessel under the specified loading condition. Loadgroups may also be created and cross referenced into loadcases. Other input consists of: tank sounding pipes; key points, such as downflooding points, immersion and embarkation points; margin lines and section modulus.

Page 3


Analysis Types Hydromax contains the following analysis tools: Upright hydrostatics Large angle stability Equilibrium analysis Specified Condition analysis KN values and cross curves of stability Limiting KG analysis Floodable Length analysis Longitudinal Strength analysis Tank Calibrations

Although common analysis settings are used where possible, different analyses may require different settings. For example: the upright hydrostatics analysis simply requires a range of drafts; whereas the longitudinal strength analysis requires a detailed load distribution. The analysis settings for each analysis type are explained in detail in the analysis synopsis below.

Analysis Settings The analysis settings describe the condition of the vessel to be tested. For example, a range of drafts in the case of upright hydrostatics, or a range of heel angles for a large angle stability analysis. The following analysis settings are available: Heel Trim Draft Displacement Permeability Specified condition

The analysis settings are specified prior to running the analysis. Settings that are not relevant to the selected analysis type are greyed out in the Analysis menu.

Environment Options Environmental options are modifiers that may be applied to the model or its environment that will affect the results of the all the hydrostatic analysis types.

Page 4


Depending on the analysis being performed, different environmental options may be applied to the Hydromax: Type of Fluid Simulation Density (of fluids) Wave form Grounding Intact and Damage condition

Stability Criteria Hydromax has the capability to calculate compliance with a wide range of stability criteria. These criteria are either derived from the properties of the stability curve calculated from a Large Angle Stability analysis or from the vessel‟s orientation and stability properties calculated from an Equilibrium analysis. Limiting KG and Floodable length analyses also use stability criteria. Hydromax has an extensive range of stability criteria to determine compliance with a wide range of international stability regulations. In addition, Hydromax has a generic set of parent criteria from which virtually any stability criterion can be customized.

Output Views of the hull are shown for each stage of the analysis, complete with immersed sectional areas and actual waterlines. The centres of flotation, gravity and buoyancy are also displayed. Heeled and trimmed hullforms and water plane shapes may be printed. Results are stored and may be reviewed at any time, either in tabular form, or as graphs of the various parameters across the full range of calculation. All results are accumulated in the Report window (which can be saved, copied and printed), or output directly to a Word document. The criteria checks are summarised in tables listing the status (pass/fail) of each criterion as well as the margin. The criterion settings and intermediate calculation data may also be displayed if required. For a brief overview of the different analysis that Hydromax has available, continue reading Chapter 2 Quickstart.

Page 5

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax

Chapter 2 Quickstart This chapter will briefly describe each analysis type and its output. For each analysis type, a list of the required settings as well as the available environment options is given. Hydromax contains the following analysis types Upright Hydrostatics Large Angle Stability Equilibrium Condition Specified Condition KN Values Limiting KG Floodable Length Longitudinal Strength Tank Calibrations

Each analysis has different settings that may be applied Heel Trim Draft Displacement Specified condition Permeability Loadcase Tank and compartment definition

Hydromax offers different environment options that may be applied to the analyses Fluid Densities Treatment of fluids in tanks: fluid simulation or corrected VCG Wave form Grounding Damage

Hydromax offers an extensive range of stability criteria that are applicable to equilibrium, large angle stability, limiting KG and Floodable length analysis. The Analysis types section describes each of the analysis types, settings and environment options in more detail.

Upright Hydrostatics Quickstart For Upright Hydrostatics, heel is fixed at zero heel, trim is fixed at a user defined value and draft is varied in fixed steps. Displacement and centre of buoyancy and other hydrostatic data are calculated during the analysis. Upright hydrostatics requirements

Page 7


Range of drafts to be analysed VCG (for calculation of some stability characteristics such as GMt and GMl only) Trim

Upright hydrostatic options Fluid Densities Wave form Damage Compartment definition (in case of damage)

The results are tabulated and graphs of the hydrostatic data, curves of form and sectional area at each draft are available. For more detailed information please see: Upright Hydrostatics on page 75.

Large Angle Stability Quickstart For the analysis of Large Angle Stability, displacement and centre of gravity are specified in the loadcase. A range of heel angles are specified and Hydromax calculates the righting lever and other hydrostatic data at each of these heel angles by balancing the loadcase displacement against the hull buoyancy and, if the model is free-to-trim, the centre of gravity against the centre of buoyancy such that the trimming moment is zero. Large angle stability requirements Range of heel angles to be analysed Trim (fixed or free) Loadcase or loadgroup Tank definition in the case of tank loads being included in the Loadcase (and/or for the definition of damage)

Large angle stability options Fluid Densities Treatment of fluids in tanks: fluid simulation or corrected VCG Wave form Damage Compartment definition (in case of damage) Key points Margin line and deck edge Analysis of stability criteria

The key output value is GZ (or righting lever), the horizontal distance between the centres of gravity and buoyancy. A graph of these values at the various heel angles forms a GZ curve. Various other information is often overlaid on the GZ curve, including upright GM, curves for wind heeling and passenger crowding levers and the angle of the first downflooding point. These additional data depend on which (if any) stability criteria have been selected.

Page 8


A number of other graphs may be selected from the pull-down list in the graph window. Remember that you can access this data in tabular form by double clicking in the graph window: Dynamic stability curve (Area under GZ curve, integrated from upright) Variations of other hydrostatic and form parameters may be plotted against heel angle. Maximum safe steady heel angle The sectional area curve at each of the heel angles tested may also be displayed.

Note that some of these graphs have parameters that may be adjusted in the Data Format dialog If large angle stability criteria have been selected for analysis, these results will also be reported in the criteria results table and they may lead to additional curves being displayed on the GZ curve. Downflooding angles for any key points, margin line and deck edge will also be computed and tabulated. For more detailed information please see: Large Angle Stability on page 77.

Equilibrium Condition Quickstart Equilibrium Analysis uses the Loadcase, to calculate the displacement and the location of the centre of gravity. Hydromax iterates to find the draft, heel and trim that satisfy equilibrium and reports the equilibrium hydrostatics and a cross sectional areas curve. Equilibrium analysis requirements Loadcase or loadgroup Tank definition in the case of tank loads being included in the Loadcase (and/or for the definition of damage) Compartment definition and damage case (in case of damage)

Equilibrium analysis options Fluid Densities Treatment of fluids in tanks: fluid simulation or corrected VCG Wave form Grounding Damage Compartment definition (in case of damage) Key points Margin line and deck edge Analysis of equilibrium criteria

Equilibrium analysis result table lists the hydrostatic properties of the model. If a wave form has been specified there will be a number of columns; each column contains the results for a different position of the vessel in the wave as given by the wave phase value. The sectional area curve is also calculated, as is the freeboard to any defined key points, margin line and deck edge. Any equilibrium criteria will also be evaluated and their results reported.

Page 9


For more detailed information please see: Equilibrium Analysis on page 84.

Specified Condition Quickstart In the specified condition each of the three degrees of freedom, for which the hydrostatic properties of the model are to be calculated, can be set. Specified Condition Requirements Specified Conditions Input Dialog

If fixed trim is specified, you may enter the trim or specify the forward and aft drafts (these are at the perpendiculars as specified in the Frame of Reference dialog). Specified Conditions options Fluid Densities Wave form Damage Tank and Compartment definition (in case of damage)

The output for the specified condition consists of a curve of cross sectional areas and hydrostatics of the vessel in the specified condition. For more detailed information please see Specified Conditions on page 87.

KN Values Quickstart KN values or Cross Curves of Stability are useful for assessing the stability of a vessel if its VCG is unknown. They may be calculated for a number of displacements before the height of the centre of gravity is known. The KN data may then be used to obtain the GZ curve for any centre of gravity height (KG) using the following formula: GZ = KN - KG * sin(Heel) where GZ is the righting lever measured transversely between the Centre of Buoyancy and the Centre of Gravity, and KG is the distance from the baseline to the vessel's effective Vertical Centre of Gravity. KN Values Analysis Requirements

Page 10


Range of displacements to be analysed Range of heel angles to be analysed Trim (fixed or free) Estimate of VCG (provides more accurate result if free-to-trim) TCG (if required)

KN Values Analysis Options Fluid Densities Wave form Damage Tank and Compartment definition (in case of damage)

Output is in the form of a table of KN values and a graph of Cross Curves of Stability. If the analysis is performed free-to-trim and an estimate of the VCG is known, this may be specified. The computed KN results will then give a more accurate estimate of GZ for KG close to the estimated VCG since the effects of VCG on trim have been more accurately accounted for. For more detailed information please see KN Values Analysis on page 89.

Limiting KG Quickstart The Limiting KG analysis may be used to obtain the highest vertical position of the centre of gravity (maximum KG) for which the selected stability criteria are just passed. This may be done for a range of vessel displacements. At each of the specified displacements, Hydromax runs several Large Angle Stability analyses at different KGs. The selected stability criteria are evaluated; the centre of gravity is increased until one of the criteria fails. Limiting KG Analysis Requirements Range of displacements to be analysed Range of heel angles to be analysed Trim (fixed or free) Stability criteria for which limiting KG is to be found TCG (if required)

Limiting KG Analysis Options Fluid Densities Wave form Damage Tank and Compartment definition (in case of damage) Laodcase (in case of initial loading of damaged tanks) Key points (if required for criteria) Margin line and deck edge (if required for criteria)

Page 11


A graph of maximum permissible GZ plotted against vessel displacement is produced as well as tabulated results indicating which stability criteria limited the VCG. If limiting curves are required for each of the stability criteria individually, this may be done in the Batch Analysis mode. A check will be made to ensure that any selected equilibrium criteria are passed, however at least one large angle stability criterion is required. Only relevant criteria will be used, i.e. if a damage case is chosen, only damage criteria will be evaluated; if the intact condition is used, only intact criteria will be evaluated. Some criteria, such as angle of maximum GZ, are very insensitive to VCG and may prevent the analysis converging. If the analysis is unable to converge for a certain displacement this will be noted and the next displacement tried. For more detailed information see Limiting KG on page 92.

Floodable Length Quickstart This analysis mode is used to compute the maximum compartment lengths based on user-specified equilibrium criteria. Floodable Lengths may be computed for a range of displacements; the LCG may be specified directly or calculated from a specified initial trim. In addition a range of permeabilities may be specified. The VCG is also required to ensure accurate balance of the CG against the CB at high angles of trim. As well as the standard deck edge and margin line immersion criteria (one of which must be specified) the user can also add criteria for maximum trim angle and minimum required values of longitudinal and transverse metacentric height. Floodable Length Analysis Requirements Range of displacements to be analysed VCG Range of permeabilities to be analysed Trim (free- to- trim to either initial trim or specified LCG) Floodable length criteria to be tested

Margin line and deck edge (required for criteria)

Floodable Length Analysis Options Fluid Densities Wave form

Page 12


The output is in the form of tabulated Floodable Lengths for each displacement and permeability. The data is tabulated for each of the stations as defined in Maxsurf. The data is also presented graphically. For more detailed information please see Floodable Length on page 99.

Longitudinal Strength Quickstart Hydromax calculates the net load from the buoyancy and weight distribution of the model. That data is then used to calculate the bending moment and shear force on the vessel. Longitudinal Strength Analysis Requirements Loadcase (including distributed loads if required) Tank definition in the case of tank loads being included in the Loadcase (and/or for the definition of damage)

Longitudinal Strength Analysis Options Fluid Densities Treatment of fluids in tanks: fluid simulation is always used for Longitudinal Strength analysis Wave form Grounding Damage Compartment definition and damage case (in case of damage) Allowable shear and bending moment

The longitudinal strength graph and tables contain all information on weight and buoyancy distribution, the shear force and bending moment on the vessel. If defined, graphs of allowable shear and bending moment are superimposed on the graph. For more detailed information please see Longitudinal Strength on page 102.

Tank Calibrations Quickstart Tanks can be defined and calibrated for capacity, centre of gravity and free surface moment (FSM). Fluid densities and tank permeabilities can be varied arbitrarily. Tank calibrations are for the upright (zero heel) vessel, but the vessel's trim may be specified. Hydromax uses its fluid simulation mode to calculate the actual position of the fluids in the tanks, taking into account the vessel trim. Tank ullages are measured from the top of the sounding pipe to the free surface of the liquid within the tank along the sounding pipe and in a similar manner, soundings are measured from the bottom of the sounding pipe to the free surface. Tank calibration analysis requirements Tank definitions Sounding pipe definition (if required) Sounding intervals for calibration levels Trim

Page 13


Tank calibration analysis options Fluid Densities Treatment of fluids in tanks: fluid simulation always selected Damage: Intact case always selected

For each tank, a table of capacities, volumes etc. is calculated. These results are presented in both tabular and graphical forms. For more detailed information please see Tank Calibrations on page 104.

Probabilistic Damage Quickstart Attained index using probabilistic damage analysis may be computed. Probabilistic damage analysis requirements Loadcase definitions Tank and compartmentation definition Main probabilistic damage analysis parameters and criteria setup Subdivision definitions Heel angle range for GZ curve calculation Trim

Probabilistic damage analysis options Treatment of fluids in tanks: fluid simulation or corrected VCG Wave form Key points Margin line and deck edge

For more detailed information please see the Probabilistic Damage section.

Page 14


Chapter 3 Using Hydromax This chapter describes Getting Started Hydromax Model Analysis Types Analysis Settings Analysis Environment Options Analysis Output

Getting Started This section contains everything you need to do to start using Hydromax Installing Hydromax Starting Hydromax

Installing Hydromax

Install Hydromax by inserting the CD and running the Setup program, then follow the instructions on screen. Note: Before installing any program from the Maxsurf suite for the first time, please read the purchase letter (also referred to as installation manual). Starting Hydromax

After installation, Hydromax should be accessible through the Start Menu. Simply select Hydromax from the Maxsurf menu item under Programs in the Start menu. Windows Registry

Certain preferences used by Hydromax are stored in the Windows registry. It is possible for this data to become corrupted, or you may simply want to revert back to the default configuration. To clear the Hydromax preferences, start the program with the Shift key depressed. You will be asked if you wish to clear the preferences, click OK, doing this will reset all the preferences. The following preferences are stored in the registry:

Page 15


Colour and line thickness settings of contours and background Fonts Window size and location Size of resizing dialogs (alternatively, these may be reset by holding down the shift key when activating them) Density of fluids Heel angles for large angle stability, KN and Limiting KG analyses Permeabilities for floodable length analysis Location of files Units for data input and results output Convergence tolerance (Error values) Maximum number of loadcases Reporting preferences

Note: The default density for the fluid labelled "Sea Water" is stored in the windows registry. All hydrostatic calculations use this. Check the density of seawater after resetting your preferences. It is recommended to save your customized densities with your project using the File | Save Densities As command.

Hydromax Model This section describes how to open a Maxsurf model in Hydromax and provides some important information to ensure that your model is correctly interpreted by Hydromax. Preparing a Design in Maxsurf Opening a New Design Opening an Existing Hydromax Design File Updating the Hydromax Model Hydromax Sections Forming Checking the Hydromax model

After checking the Hydromax model, the next step is to check the Hydromax settings and initial analysis conditions. Setting Initial Conditions

Depending on the analysis performed, you may need to set up the following additional model data:

Page 16


Working with Loadcases Modelling Compartments Forming Compartments Compartment Types Damage Case Definition Sounding Pipes Key Points (e.g. Down Flooding Points) Margin Line Points Modulus Points and Allowable Shears and Moments Stability Criteria

Preparing a Design in Maxsurf

There are several important checks that must be carried out in Maxsurf before opening a design in Hydromax: Setting the Zero Point Setting the Frame of Reference Surface Use Skin Thickness Outside Arrows Trimming Coherence of the Maxsurf surface model

Setting the Zero Point

Ensure that the zero point is correctly setup in Maxsurf. A consistent zero point and frame of reference should be used for the model throughout the Maxsurf suite. In Hydromax you have the option of displaying longitudinal measurements such as LCB or LCF from the model zero point or amidships. Setting the Frame of Reference

It is vital that the Frame of Reference is correctly setup in Maxsurf before attempting to analyse the model in Hydromax. The Frame of reference should not be changed in Hydromax. The frame of reference defines the fore and aft perpendiculars, the baseline and the datum waterline; midships is automatically defined midway between the perpendiculars. By convention, in the profile and plan views, the vessel‟s bow is on the right. The perpendiculars define the longitudinal positions of the vessel‟s draft marks and cannot be coincident. The base line is the datum from which the drafts and KG are measured. The frame of reference cannot be changed in Hydromax. However it is possible to specify upto nine additional locations at which the drafts should be reported. This is done through the Data | Draft Marks dialog.

Page 17


Note: Draft and Trim specification It should be remembered that the drafts specified for an analysis are the drafts at the perpendiculars (or amidships) and the trim specified (and reported) is the difference between the draft at the AP and draft at the FP. Surface Use

In Maxsurf you can choose between two types of surface use Hull Hull surfaces are used to define the watertight envelope of the hull. Internal structure Internal structure surfaces are used for all other surfaces (any surfaces which do not make up the watertight envelope) and also surfaces which are to be used in Hydromax to define the boundaries of tanks and compartments that have complex shapes. The following table describes the difference between each surface use in Hydromax: Included:

Hull Shell

Internal Structure

Hydrostatic sections Selection of tank/compartment boundaries Skin thickness applied to the surface Verify that all surfaces that are to be used as tank/compartment boundaries are defined as Internal Structure. If a surface is defined as internal structure, it is not included as part of the hull shell by Hydromax, i.e. internal surfaces will be ignored in the forming of hydrostatic sections. Skin Thickness

If skin thickness is to be used in hydrostatic calculations, ensure that the thickness and projection direction have been specified for the hull shell surfaces. Thickness can be specified differently for each hull surface, resulting in more accurate hydrostatics. To activate skin thickness in Hydromax ensure that the “Include Skin Thickness” option is selected when reading the file or calculating the hull sections. Note Tank boundaries made from internal structures surfaces do not have skin thickness. To include skin thickness, the internal structure surface should be placed to model the inside of the tank if the tank wall has significant thickness. Skin thickness for hull surfaces will be treated so that the hull sections go to the outside of the plate whilst any tanks are trimmed to the inside of the plate.

Page 18


Outside Arrows

The surfaces‟ outside arrows define the orientation of the surfaces. Ensure that you have used the Outside Arrows command from the Maxsurf Display menu to define which direction points outwards (towards the seawater) for each surface. The surface direction may be flipped by clicking on the end of the arrow. Trimming

Ensure that all surfaces are trimmed correctly. At any longitudinal position on the hull, you should have completely closed transverse sections or sections with at most one opening (e.g. the deck).

Correct Section with no opening.

Correct section with one opening: this section will be closed across the top.

Also see: Hydromax Sections Forming on page 26 Checking the Hydromax model on page 29 Coherence of the Maxsurf surface model

Hydromax will generally have no problem correctly interpreting your design as long as the following requirements for the Maxsurf model are observed:

Page 19


Make sure that each surface touches its adjacent surfaces at its edge, preferably by bonding the edges together Where surfaces intersect, trim away the excess regions of the surface; e.g. the part of the keel that is inside the hull and the part of the hull that is inside the keel Do not have surfaces that cannot be closed in an unambiguous fashion, i.e. a maximum of one gap in a transverse section through the hull. Remember that the inner portions of each intersecting contour will be trimmed off Check surface use; internal structure surfaces are ignored when forming the hull sections in Hydromax

Note: For groups internal structure surfaces that will be used to define tank (or compartment boundaries) the same requirements apply. Also see: Checking the Hydromax model on page 29. Opening a New Design

File opening in Hydromax is window specific, i.e. Hydromax will automatically look for compartment definition files when you are in a Compartment Definition window and a loadcase in a Loadcase window. To open a design for analysis, ensure that the design view window is active, then select Open Design from the File menu. Choose a Maxsurf design file (.msd). The following dialog will appear:

Calculate new Sections

Choosing Calculate Sections will calculate the specified number of sections through the hull. These will then be used for the Hydrostatics calculations. The meaning of (ignore existing data, if any) is explained in Opening an Existing Hydromax Design File. Include Plating Thickness

At this stage, any surface thickness specified in the Maxsurf Surface Properties dialog may be included. Use Trimmed Surfaces

If the Maxsurf model has trimmed surfaces, the Use Trimmed Surfaces item should be ticked. Page 20


Stations

When calculating stations, you may select how many stations should be used. Reducing the number of stations will speed up the analysis time but reduce the accuracy, conversely increasing the number of stations will increase the analysis time but lead to higher accuracy results. The first option allows you to use the station grid created in Maxsurf. This is extremely useful for hulls that have features such as keels or bow thrusters that need to be accurately modelled and may need a locally denser station spacing to do so. It also allows designs with significant longitudinal discontinuities in their sectional areas to have stations specified either side of the discontinuity, avoiding any errors inherent in the integration of evenly spaced stations. For example, if it was known that a design had a significant discontinuity in its sectional area curve at amidships, by specifying one station 1mm aft of amidships and one station 1mm forward of amidships this discontinuity can be modelled very accurately. The upper limit for the number of stations is 200. Surface Precision

The Surface Precision options has two functions: Setting for calculating the hydrostatic sections Setting used to form new compartments or tanks.

The precision at which the design was saved in Maxsurf is included in the Maxsurf design file (.msd). Hydromax recognises this precision setting and will and set the Surface Precision button accordingly. Note: Maxsurf surface trimming information may vary for different precisions. Therefore it is recommended not to change the precision setting when opening the Maxsurf design file in Hydromax.

Note: The accuracy of the results depends much more on the number of sections than the accuracy at which the sections are calculated. Reducing the precision of the sections can greatly improve performance, usually at relatively small impact on the accuracy of the hydrostatics. Opening an Existing Hydromax Design File

After saving the Maxsurf design file for the first time in Hydromax, a “Hydromax Design file” (.hmd) is created. The Hydromax design file will consist of the hydrostatic sections and all input data such as loadcases, compartment definition, key points, sounding pipes etc. Hydromax also allows saving of all input and output files into individual files. To open an existing design, there are two options:

Page 21


Double click on the .hmd file from any Windows explorer window Use the Hydromax Open command form the file menu and select the .msd file

An existing Hydromax design consists of a number of files with different file extensions.

When Hydromax opens a .msd file, it will look for a .hmd file with the same name as the .msd file. For example: when opening OSV.msd, the OSV.hmd file is found. The Calculate Sections dialog now has the option to read the sections from the file.



Ensure “Read existing data and sections” is selected and click OK.

Hydromax will now open the .hmd file. This contains hydrostatic sections information and all input information from last time the .hmd file was saved, i.e. compartment definitions, loadcases, damage cases, key points etc. Notes: 1) When selecting “Read existing data and sections (do not update geometry)” the Maxsurf surface information is not recalculated. This means that changes to the hull shape in the Maxsurf Design file, are not automatically incorporated. You will load your existing sections, loadcases and compartment definitions etc. See: Updating the Hydromax Model on page 25 for more information.

Page 22


2) Calculate new sections (ignore existing data, if any) means that Hydromax will recalculate the hull sections and ignore any data stored in the .hmd file. You will have to reload your individual loadcases and compartment definition files etc after you have selected this option and pressed OK. Do not choose this option if you wish to keep the additional Hydromax data and you have not yet saved them as individual files as if the model is saved in Hydromax the .hmd file will be overwritten and any existing data lost. For more information on file properties and extensions in Hydromax, please see: File Extension Reference Table on page 289. Effect of Zero Point change

The description below relates to what happens in the following situation: A hull model is generated in Maxsurf Tank and load etc. data is then created in Hydromax and that data all saved in the .hmd file (as is done when you chose Save when the drawing window is top most). The model is closed in Hydromax The model is opened in Maxsurf and for some reason the location of the zero point is changed The model is reopened in Hydromax and the tank and load etc. data is automatically read from the .hmd file. Hydromax 13 behaviour

It may sometimes occur that the model zero point location is changed in Maxsurf after tank, loadcase. Etc. data is defined in Hydromax. In previous versions of Hydromax this could cause problems because the loadcase and tank data maintained their position relative to the zero point, where as the key points and margin line remained in the same position relative to the hull. The two images from Hydromax 13 show this problem. The first image shows the model as initially defined in Hydromax with the zero point amidships and at the baseline. In the second image, the zero point has been moved (in Maxsurf) to the aft-perpendicular and the DWL. Note that whilst the margin line and key points have remained in their same locations relative to the hull, the tanks and centre of gravity (from the loadcase) have remained in their same locations relative to the zero point.

Original location of data as entered in Hydromax before zero point change in Maxsurf.

Page 23


Effect of Zero point change in Maxsurf 13. Hydromax 14 behaviour

To rectify this problem, when loading a .hmd file, Hydromax now detects if the zero point has been modified in Maxsurf when the model is reopened in Hydromax. Note that this is only possible with Hydromax models that have been saved from the new version of Hydromax (because the new version of Hydromax now saves the zero point independently so that it can check for changes).

Original location of data as entered in Hydromax before zero point change in Maxsurf.

Now, if the zero point has changed, Hydromax will display the following message:

If the zero point is moved in Maxsurf, you will now be prompted.

Selecting “yes” will maintain the position all the Hydromax data relative to the hull; essentially just the zero point it moved. This of course means that the numerical values of the various data are changed: Page 24


Click “yes” to maintain position of tanks, loads etc relative to the hull.

Selecting “no” will move all data other than the margin line with the zero point. Thus the tanks and loads etc. will move relative to the hull, but their numerical values will remain the same: The example shown is quite extreme, it is more likely that this option would be selected if it was realised that the zero point for the tank plan were slightly different than the zero point of the lines plan and a small correction to the zero point was required.

Click “no” to maintain position relative to zero point.

Updating the Hydromax Model

To update the hydrostatic sections to the latest Maxsurf Design File, select “Recalculate Hull sections” in the analysis menu after reloading the Maxsurf Design File with the “read existing data and sections from file” option selected. This function can also be used to include/exclude surface thickness or change the number of sections and to change use/not use trimmed surfaces without reloading the Maxsurf Design File. The “Recalculate Hull Sections” command recalculates Hull surfaces as well as Tank Boundary surfaces (Internal Structure surfaces in Maxsurf). Any tanks and loadcases will also be updated with this command.

Page 25


Note: Changes to the Maxsurf design are only recalculated after the new Maxsurf design has been re-loaded into Hydromax. This means that if the model is simultaneously being edited in Maxsurf and Hydromax, it is necessary to: 1) save and close the model in Hydromax 2) save in Maxsurf 3) open in Hydromax, using “Read existing data and sections” to make sure the loadcase, compartment definition etc remain part of the Hydromax design file. 4) use the “Recalculate Hull Sections” from the analysis menu. Hydromax Sections Forming

Hydromax works by applying trapezoidal integration to data calculated from a series of cross sections taken through the Maxsurf model surfaces. Hydromax will automatically form these sections, called “Hydromax sections”, “hydrostatic sections” or just “sections”. Hydromax deals only with sections that are completely closed, or can be unambiguously closed. This section outlines the section forming process used in Hydromax and may be helpful when preparing a Maxsurf design for Hydromax. Whilst it is always preferable to give Hydromax a completely closed model with no ambiguities, Hydromax will try to resolve any problems with the model definition in the manner outlined in the following sections. Note: The golden rule is that for any longitudinal position, the section must be made up of closed, non-intersecting (and non-self-intersecting) contours. In practice, one opening is acceptable and this will be automatically closed with a straight line. Furthermore, contours cannot be contained wholly within another contour. The same is true for groups of internal surfaces that have been selected to define a tank boundary.

Where a section consists of an open shell (e.g. a hull surface with no deck), Hydromax will automatically close the section with a straight line connecting the opening ends.

If, however, the section is made up of two line segments, (e.g. having both a gap at the centreline as well as an open deck), an ambiguity exists as to how the two line segments will be connected. This is not an acceptable shape.

Page 26


In the example above, if either the top or bottom gap had been closed in Maxsurf the design would cease to be ambiguous. Multiple surfaces that are trimmed correctly, bonded together or use compacted control points will not cause any problems when opened in Hydromax. Hydromax will form a closed section through multiple surfaces by linking the curve segments together.

Page 27


A section through a multihull containing a single closed contour

A section comprising two closed contours

Hydromax will link curve segments together if they are only separated by a small amount. The user cannot change these tolerances, because there are too many dependencies in the program. Where surfaces intersect, Hydromax will make an attempt to remove excess portions of the curve to form a single continuous contour. However this is not always possible so it is much better practice to trim the model correctly manually. Ambiguous Sections (e.g. decks, bulwarks)

A common example of ambiguous sections is a model with multiple decks. Hydromax will have difficulties distinguishing the intended main deck.

Hydromax closes the outside contour and trims remnants

Page 28


The example above has bulwarks; generally these will be treated correctly by Hydromax and removed, but this depends on the height of the bulwark relative to the rest of the section. To prevent ambiguities it is recommended to trim the bulwark in Maxsurf. If the bulwark‟s volume is expected to influence the hydrostatic calculations, the bulwark‟s volume has to be properly modelled in Maxsurf by modelling both the outside and the inside of the bulwark. Checking the Hydromax model

Before starting any analysis you should check whether Hydromax has been able to correctly interpret your design. The following tools are available to validate the Hydromax model. Show Single Hull Section Checking the Sectional Area Curve Using Rendering to Check the Model

Note: Sections that are not formed correctly cause the majority of problems with Hydromax models. Therefore, checking your sections after opening the design in Hydromax is strongly recommended. Incorrect sections in the model will give incorrect results. These sections should be continuous with no gaps and no unexpected lines. In particular, look closely at intersections between surfaces to make sure that Hydromax has interpreted the shape correctly. Show Single Hull Section

In the body plan view, you can step through the sections one-by-one to verify that they have been correctly calculated. This is done by selecting Show Single Hull Section in Body Plan view from the Display menu. You can then click in the inset box to view the sections, the left and right arrow cursor keys will enable you to step through the sections one-by-one. This works the same as the Maxsurf body plan window and is an extremely powerful tool to validate your Hydromax model. For more information see the Maxsurf manual.

Page 29


Checking the Sectional Area Curve

Another way of checking the Hydromax model is to perform a specified condition analysis at quite deep draft and look carefully at the sectional area curve in the graph window. If this displays any unexpected spikes or hollows Hydromax may not have correctly interpreted the hull shape. This is not a foolproof method since it does not necessarily highlight problems in the non-immersed part of the hull.

This Cross Sectional Area curve indicates there may be a problem with section forming from 12 m to 16 m. Using Rendering to Check the Model

The model may also be rendered, which makes it easier to see if there are any areas of the model which have not been properly defined. Select Render from the Display menu whilst in the perspective view and turn on the sections: Page 30


Note: In rare instances incorrect rendering may occur. This does not necessarily mean that the model is incorrect. As long as the sections are formed correctly, the model is correct. Setting Initial Conditions

All Hydromax calculations are performed in the frame of reference of the model. Hydromax uses the aft perpendicular and forward perpendicular together with the baseline and the zero point for all calculations and gives the results in the units specified in the display menu. Note: Before you run any analysis using Hydromax, it is important that you set up the required initial conditions for the design. Coordinate System

Hydromax uses the Maxsurf coordinate system:

Longitudinal Transverse Vertical

+ve forward +ve starboard +ve up

-ve aft -ve port -ve down

Page 31


View window Body plan Plan Profile

View direction From the stern, looking fwd From above, Port side above the centreline (this the opposite direction to Maxsurf) From Starboard, bow to the right.

Frame of Reference and Zero Point

It is essential that a frame of reference be specified. This should be done in Maxsurf and not in Hydromax. Draft and trim are measured on the forward and aft perpendiculars. If these are not in the correct positions, some analysis results will be meaningless or may even fail to complete. See: Setting the Zero Point and Setting the Frame of Reference on page 17. Note: Changing the zero point in Maxsurf will not update the compartment definition, loadcase and other input values. Changing the zero point after you have started analysing the model in Hydromax is not recommended. Draft Marks

Drafts are automatically calculated at the perpendiculars and amidships, should you require drafts to be calculated at other locations, you may specify upto nine additional locations at which the drafts should be reported. This is done through the Data | Draft Marks dialog. Drafts are always measured to the Baseline in the centre plane of the vessel. Immersed depth measurements are made perpendicualar to the free-surface.

Difference between “Immersed depth” and “Draft” measurements

Page 32


User-defined Draft Marks

Note that the Trim is still defined as the difference between the drafts at the perpendiculars and the Midship draft (used to define the range of immersions for the Upright Hydrostatics analysis) is the mean of the drafts at the perpendiculars; i.e. neither of these values has changed and neither are affected by the user-defined draft locations. Drafts can only be defined when the vessel is rotated to the DWL (Display | Set vessel to DWL).

User-defined draft locations and new toolbar button

Note: Draft and Trim specification It should be remembered that the drafts specified for an analysis are the drafts at the perpendiculars (or amidships) and the trim specified (and reported) is the difference between the draft at the AP and draft at the FP. Customising Coefficients

In Hydromax you may choose between the length between perpendiculars and the waterline length for the calculation of Block, Prismatic and Waterplane Area Coefficients. You may also select the draft, beam and sectional area to be used for calculation of these coefficients. The LCB and LCF can be displayed in the Results windows relative to the specified Zero Point, Amidships location, Aft Perpendicular, Fwd Perpendicular or from the Aft, Middle or fwd end of the actual waterline. You can also specify whether you want the forward (towards the bow) or the aft (towards the stern) to have a positive sign. Finally you can chose whether you want the LCB and LCF to be displayed as a length or as a percentage of the waterline or LPP length as specified in the Length for Coefficients.

Page 33


Data | Coefficients dialog Setting Units

The units used may be specified using the Units command. In addition to the length and weight (mass) units, units for force and speed (used in wind heeling and heeling due to high-speed turn etc. criteria) and the angular units to be used for areas under GZ curves, may also be set. The angular units for measuring heel and trim angles are always degrees. Units may be changed at any time.

Page 34


Other Initial Conditions

See: Fluids Analysis Methods on page 137 Density on page 140 Working with Loadcases

Loadcases define the loading condition of the vessel. Static weights that make up the vessel lightship are specified here as well as tank filling levels, expressed as either a percentage of the full tank capacity or as a weight. Loadcases automatically contain all the tanks defined in the Tank definition. Loadgroups are special loadcases that contain no tanks. These may be used to define groups of fixed weights (such as the steel weight or lightship weight) in a single location which may then be cross-referenced into a loadcase. Any changes to the loadgroup are then automatically incorporated into any loadcases that reference them. A loadgroup is included in a loadcase simply by specifying the loadgroup name in the “Item Name” column. The loadcase will normally update the column totals automatically as weights or tank loadings are changed. The exception to this is if tanks have not yet been formed or the vessel is still rotated from the result of an analysis. If the loadcase does not update, click on the update Loadcase button and ensure that the hull is at the DWL by selecting “Set vessel to DWL”:

Page 35


The individual loads can be displayed graphically:

Creating a new Loadcase File

To create a load case, switch to the loadcase view by selecting Loadcase from the Loadcase sub-menu in the Window menu. Then select “New Load Case” from the File menu or press Ctrl+N. A new load spreadsheet will be displayed in the Loadcase window. The default loadcase will contain a lightship entry and an entry for each tank (with a default filling of 50%).

Page 36


The tabs in the bottom of the window can be used to skip through the different loadcases in the design. Create New Loadcases based on Template

To avoid rework, an existing loadcase may be used as a template when creating a new loadcase. To do this, 

In the loadcase window, select the Loadcase you wish to use as a template

Bring the loadcase you wish to use as a template to the front for example by clicking on the tab on the bottom 

select File | New

First, you will be asked for a new Loadcase name after which the following dialog appears:

Page 37


A new loadcase will appear in one of the blank (…) loadcase tabs. If there are no blank tabs left, you will either have to close an existing loadcase, or add more loadcases using the Case | Max. Number of Loadcases command. Note The template is only used during the creation of the loadcase. Once a loadcase has been created from a template loadcase, changes made in the template are NOT automatically changed in the loadcase derived from it. Naming and Saving a Loadcase

A loadcase can be given any name by saving it to a separate file where the loadcase filename will be used as the loadcase name and displayed on the tab in the loadcase window. Alternatively, 

Select Edit Loadcase from the Case menu



Changing the name in the Loadcase Properties dialog.

The next time you use the File | Save Loadcase command you will be asked to confirm the loadcase file name. Loading a Saved Loadcase

You can load a saved loadcase into your loadcase window by: 

Select an empty tab in the loadcase window that you wish to load the loadcase into

Empty tab.

If there are no empty tabs, you should either increase the maximum number of loadcases (see below), or close an existing loadcase. 

Page 38

Select File | Open Load Case




Select the .hml file you wish to open.

Setting the Maximum Number of Loadcases

The maximum number of loadcases (up to twenty-five) that can be loaded in Hydromax at any one time is set by selecting “Max. Number of Loadcases” from the Case menu. You may then enter the maximum number of load cases you require.

You must restart Hydromax for this change to take effect. In most cases, you will only need to set this once to the maximum number of loadcases you are ever likely to use. For convenience of use, a sensible number is recommended. Each loadcase can be selected and used for analysis. Each may be saved and loaded independently, effectively allowing you as many loadcases as you require. Note: When loading a design that has more loadcases than the maximum you have currently set in Hydromax, you will receive a warning and the file will not be loaded. You must increase the maximum number of allowable loadcases and restart Hydromax before you can load the design. Closing a Loadcase 

Select the tab of the loadcase you wish to close in the Loadcase window



Select File | Close Load Case

Adding and Deleting Loads

To add an extra load to the loadcase, 

Select Add Load from the Edit menu or press Ctrl+A.

A new load will be inserted into the table above the currently selected row. You can repeat this process for as many loads as you wish. If you want to remove a load from the table, simply click anywhere in the row you want to remove, and choose Delete Load from the Edit menu (or highlight the complete row by clicking the grey cell to the left of the row and press the Delete key). If you wish to delete several loads simultaneously, click and drag so that all of the loading rows that you wish to delete are selected, then select Delete Load. Editing Loads

Click on the cell containing the load name and type in a name for this load, for example "Lightship", and press the Tab key to go to the next column in the table (or simply click directly in the cell you wish to edit). For each item in the list you can specify a quantity. This is used to calculate the total weight of that item. For example: if the item was “crew” with a weight per unit, you could specify the quantity and unit weight, and the total weight of crew would be automatically calculated. The weight of each item should be entered in the next column. Page 39


The weight must always be positive. If for some reason you wish to have an upward (negative) load, you can do so by entering a negative quantity – this can be useful if you want to apply a pure moment to the model by applying equal magnitude, but opposite sign loads to the vessel in the loadcase. Tab to the next column and enter the horizontal lever for the item. After you type in this number, press enter and the total LCG will be automatically re-calculated and displayed in the bottom row of the table. The CG position will also be shown and updated in the View windows if Large Angle Stability, Longitudinal Strength or Equilibrium analysis are selected. Note: Levers, as with all other measurements in Hydromax, are measured from the Zero Point. Loadcase Sorting

A number of tools are available for controlling the order in which items and tanks occur in the loadcase. You may move selected items and tanks up and down in the loadcase; you may also sort selected items by name, fluid type (for tanks) etc.

Insert row | Delete row | Sort rows | Move row(s) up | Move row(s) down

Sort selected columns

After moving loads, subtotals and subsubtotals, you may have to use Analysis | Update Loadcase ( button) to update the subtotals and subsubtotals. To ensure data consistency, Hydromax does this automatically prior to running an analysis. Loadcase Formatting

Hydromax allows you to improve the presentation of the Load Case window by adding blank, heading or sub-total lines in the table. Adding Component or Heading Lines Components or headings can be included in a load case by preceding the text with a period (.) character. Adding Blank Lines A blank line can be added into the load case by placing a dollar ($), apostrophe („) or full-stop(.) character in the Item Name field.

Page 40


Adding Totals or Subtotals A subtotal can be displayed for several loads within a load case. To do this the item name field must commence with the word „total‟ or „subtotal‟. Sub-subtotals Sub-sub-totals may also be inserted. Sub-subtotals must start with the text “subsubtotal”. Grouping Similar Tanks Use the move items UP or Down commands in the Edit menu to adjust the row order in the loadcase. Quantity and Unit mass for sub total rows

If a sub total includes only tanks, then the quantity and unit mass items will be included. The unit mass is the sum of all the masses of the full tanks and the quantity is the sum of the masses divided by the sum of the full tank masses. When tanks are grouped by fluid type this can be useful for calculating the total tank capacity for that fluid type.

Loadcase Colour Formatting

Different colours can be defined for fixed mass items and tanks; alternatively, tanks may be displayed in the same colour as the fluid they contain (As defined in Analysis | Fluids dialog). 

View | Colours and lines menu when Loadcase window is frontmost

Loadcase format

It is possible to select which columns are displayed in the loadcase window. Use the Display | Data Format dialog:

Page 41


The Relative density and Fluid Type which allow you to override the default tank densities as defined for each tank in the Compartment Definition window. This can be useful for vessels such as product carriers which may have cargos of different types of fluids with different densities. Moment columns (mass * lever) can be displayed if desired. Longitudinally Distributed Loads

Distributed loads can be entered in the Loadcase window in the aft limit and forward limit cells. The aft limit and forward limit columns only appear when Longitudinal Strength analysis is selected and the distributed loads will only have an effect on the results in this analysis mode. The “Long. Arm” column defines the longitudinal position of the centre of the load; the fore and aft limits define the longitudinal extents of the load.

If the longitudinal arm is changed in the Loadcase window, the forward and aft limits will be moved by the same amount. For an evenly distributed load, the centre of gravity should be midway between the forward and aft limits.

Page 42


Evenly distributed loads. Red = green and divided in the centre.

For trapezium shaped distributed loads the centre of gravity is not midway between the boundaries, but within the middle third 1/3 of the centre.

Trapezium shaped distributed load. Red = Green divided within middle 1/3 of centre.

Note: Since the load is distributed as a trapezium, the centre of gravity should lie within the middle third between the forward and aft limits of the load, at these extrema, the load distribution becomes triangular. Tanks will be automatically treated as distributed loads for the longitudinal strength calculations. Tank Loads

When you create tanks using the compartment definition, they will be automatically included in the loadcases (but not in Loadgroups which do not contain tanks). Page 43


Tanks have a quantity value, expressed as a percentage of the full capacity and a weight column. Tank level can be given as either a percentage of full capacity, volume, a sounding or a weight.

The tank Unit Mass is the tanks mass at 100% filling.

When a tank is changed in the Compartment definition table, question marks may be shown in the loadcase momentarily while the tank‟s new volumetric properties are being calculated. To update the loadcase for changes in tank loads, select Update Loadcase from the Analysis menu or toolbar.

Updating tank values in the loadcase

Irrespective of whether you have updated the values in the Loadcase Condition, the Loadcase will be automatically updated as the first step of any analysis using the Loadcase information. Also see: Update Loadcase on page 195 Loadcase cross-referencing; Loadgroups

It is possible to cross-reference one loadcase from another. This is useful if you wish to define a detailed lightship mass distribution but do not want to have it displayed in full in each loadcase. It also means that this lightship mass distribution would only need to be defined and edited in one location instead of in each loadcase. To prevent the problems of recursively including the same loadcase and also prevent tanks from being included more than once, we have defined the following rules: A special type of Loadcase called a Loadgroup has been defined. A Loadgroup does not contain tanks Only a Loadgroup can be referenced Only a Loadcase can reference a Loadgroup. A Loadcase can reference any number of Loadgroups A Loadgroup is referenced in a Loadcase by typing the name of the Loadgroup to be referenced in the Item column You can factor the referenced Loadgroup by changing the value of the Quantity column in the Loadcase. Loadgroups may be analysed in the same way as Loadcases – but remember the tanks are implicitly empty in a Loadgroup.

For the example above this means that the lightship mass distribution would be defined as a Loadgroup and then this Loadgroup could be referenced in any number of loadcases. The Loadcase properties dialog (Case menu) is used to define a loadcase as a Loadgroup:

Page 44


This lightship Loadgroup contains the lightship mass distribution along the ship. The Lightship load group can then be cross-referenced into any loadcase

Page 45


The referenced Loadgroup is automatically calculated and the appropriate values included in the Loadcase:

Note: Loadgroup naming The cross-referencing of loadgroups in a loadcase is case insensitive. Loadcase density override

It is now possible to override the default tank fluid densities as defined in the Compartment definition window. This allows you to load the same tanks with different fluids in different Loadcases – as might be the case for a product carrier, for instance. By default use tank defined densities:

Page 46


Type in a valid (>0.0) specific gravity and it will override the tank value:

Type in any string that doesn‟t begin with an “L” for the fluid and it will revert back to the tank value:

Type in some thing that begins with an “L” and it will revert back to the “Private” density of the loadcase item.

Page 47


Free surface correction

If the corrected VCG fluid option has been chosen, the Loadcase will sum the free surface moments, divide by the total displacement to obtain the VCG correction and adjust the VCG accordingly to obtain the corrected fluid VCG. Fluid simulation If the Fluid simulation option is selected in the analysis menu, no correction is made to the upright VCG. Instead, at every step of the analysis, Hydromax calculates the actual position of the fluid in the tanks taking into account heel and trim, making the tanks‟ free-surface parallel to the sea surface, thus the actual vessel CG is recalculated accounting exactly for the static shift of the fluids in slack tanks. When the corrected VCG method is selected in the analysis menu, it is possible to choose the type of free surface moment to be applied for each tank in a Hydromax Loadcase. The options available are Maximum Hydromax will use the maximum free surface moment of the tank in upright condition for all fluid levels. Actual Hydromax uses the free surface moment for the current fluid level of the tank in upright condition. IMO Hydromax uses IMO MSC75.(69) Ch 3.3 for the calculation of the free surface moment. This method approximates the movement of fluid due to heeling and is based on the fluid shift in a 50% full rectangular, box-shaped-tank. For other shapes and fillings of tanks it will not correctly approximate the free surface moment. User specified A user specified value is used for all levels and heel angles. Workshop structure

Workshop can save a Loadgroup that contains the masses of all the structural parts. This can be loaded into Hydromax and referenced in any Loadcase. Modelling Compartments

This section will describe in detail how to model different types of tanks and compartments. Besides a general explanation on how to model tanks using the compartment definition table, this section contains a number of important sections that the user should be aware off when modelling tanks: Number of Sections in Tanks on page 64 Tank and Compartment Permeability on page 56 Creating a Compartment definition file (.htk) 



Page 48

Select the Compartment Definition table by clicking on the Compartment Definition tab at the bottom of the Input window. Select New Compartment Definition from the File menu


This will give you a new set of compartment definitions with one default tank. Adding and Deleting Compartments

Before you can start adding compartments, make sure you have created a Compartment definition file, see above. Compartments may be added or deleted by 

Select Add or Delete Compartment from the Edit menu.

Add will add a tank after the currently selected compartment and Delete will delete the currently selected compartment(s). The accelerator keys Ctrl+A and the Delete key may also be used to add and delete entries respectively. Modelling Box Shape Tanks

Simple tanks and compartments are created by specifying six values that define a boxshaped boundary for the tank. This box will be called the Boundary Box. The boundary box is made up of the fore and aft extremities of the tank, the top and bottom, and the port and starboard limits of the tank. Each value defines one of the six planes of the tank. The column headings in the Compartment Definition table include terms such as 'F Bottom, 'A Top', 'F Port' and 'A Starboard'. The 'F' and 'A' abbreviations stand for Forward and Aft, in other words the two ends of the compartment. You will notice that aft columns contain the word "ditto". This means that the value is identical at the aft end of the tank to the forward end, resulting in a parallel tank. When the “Update Loadcase” command from the Analysis menu is used, or an analysis started, Hydromax will form the sections that define the tanks and compartments. This is done by finding the intersection of the tank bounding box and the hull. Thus it is not necessary to make the tanks fit the hull manually – this is done automatically by Hydromax.

Box shaped compartments can be formed from the numerical values in the compartment definition table.

See Longitudinal Extents of Boundary Box on page 64 for some recommendations regarding setting the boundary box.

Page 49


Modelling Tapered Tanks

The default is for compartments to have parallel sides. If you wish to define tapered compartments, it is possible to enter different transverse and vertical values for the points defining the forward and aft ends of the compartment. If a different value is entered in one of the “ditto” columns, a tapered tank will result. Tanks can be tapered or sloped in Plan or Profile views. Hydromax does not have a mechanism for creating a sloped tank boundary in the Body Plan view.

By changing the “ditto”-input fields, tapered tanks can be formed

Note: Tapering can be done in Plan and in Profile view. Tapered tanks in Body Plan view have to be created using a boundary surface. See Modelling Tanks Using Boundary Surfaces on page 51. Linked Tanks

Tanks and compartments may be linked. This means that although they are defined as separate tanks, they act as a single tank with a common free surface. To link tanks, compartments or non-buoyant volumes, first make them the same type as the parent and give them the same name. The easiest way to do this is to copy and paste the name from the Name column of the parent row into the Name column of the linked tank row. They may then be linked to the parent by typing l or linked in the Type column. Linked tanks and compartments do not have to be physically linked in space. However, the fluid in a linked tank or damaged compartment is always assumed to be able to flow freely between the linked volumes.

Page 50


Modelling Tanks Using Boundary Surfaces

Tanks, compartments and non-buoyant volumes may have their boundaries defined by surfaces as well as being constrained to particular dimensions. This allows for the modelling of arbitrarily shaped tanks.

Forming tanks using boundary surfaces

The surfaces to be used to define the tank boundaries are selected by clicking in the Boundary Surfaces column in the middle of the Compartments Definition table. A dialog will appear that allows you to select which surfaces form the boundary of the tank. If a tank uses boundary surfaces, the cell in the Boundary Surfaces column is coloured blue.

Page 51


If you wish to use a Maxsurf surface to define a tank or compartment, tick next to the surface name in the Boundary Surface list. Note that symmetrical surfaces appear twice as there will be a starboard and a port side copy of the surface. The Starboard surface is first in the list and the Port surface second. The port surface is also identified with the suffix (P) after the name. Note: Only internal structure surfaces appear in the boundary surfaces list. Symmetrical surfaces are duplicated, with the port-side surface having “(P)” appended to the surface name. After selecting the internal surfaces, it is necessary to type in the extents of the boundary box. Hydromax will automatically set the “Fore” and “Aft” limits of the boundary box to just within the longitudinal limits of the Boundary Surface. This ensures that at least 12 sections are inserted in the tank. Also see: Forming Compartments on page 59 Number of Sections in Tanks on page 64 Longitudinal Extents of Boundary Box on page 64 Modelling External Tanks

External tanks may not be modelled in Hydromax. However, it is normally possible to add "Hull" surfaces in the Maxsurf model, which will enclose the external tanks. The tanks can then be modelled in Hydromax.

Additional box-shaped hull surfaces used to define deck tanks

Page 52


Modelling Non-Buoyant Volumes

Non-buoyant volumes are effectively permanently flooded compartments. These parts of the hull can normally be modelled using trimmed hull surfaces. However, there are occasions where it is more convenient to use non-buoyant volumes. In some cases, where the volume to be flooded forms sections within the hydrostatic section, this is the only option, e.g. waterjet ducts. The choice whether to use trimmed surfaces or nonbuoyant volumes is primarily determined by the length of the non-buoyant volume relative to the length of the vessel. Using trimmed hull surfaces When the length of the non-buoyant volume, relative to the length of the model, is large enough; the non-buoyant volume can be calculated accurately from the hull sections. If possible, trimmed surfaces should be used. The picture below is a good example of when to use trimmed surfaces.

Propeller tunnels modelled with trimming surfaces

Using tank type: Non-buoyant volume In some cases using trimmed surfaces is just not possible. For example, when the sections of the non-buoyant volume are entirely enclosed within the hull sections (as is the case for a water jet duct) the use of a non-buoyant volume is the only way in which these features can be modelled.

Water-jet ducts modelled as non-buoyant volumes

Page 53


Another occasion when non-buoyant volumes should be used, is when the length of the compartment relative to the length of the hull is too small to calculate its volume from the hull sections. A good example of this is a bow thruster on a long ship. If the vessel is very long, and the thruster duct is of small diameter, there may not be sufficient sections to model it accurately (even if you use the maximum of 200 sections for the Hydromax model). In this case you are better off modelling the thruster duct as internal structure and using these surfaces to define a non-buoyant volume. For example: in the image below the bow thruster volume is only calculated with one section.

For more information, see Number of Sections in Tanks on page 64. Tip: Besides increasing the number of sections through the bow thruster from 1 to 12, modelling the thruster duct as a non-buoyant volume has the additional advantage of being able to specify a Tank and Compartment Permeability, and hence also account for the thruster.

Bow thruster tube modelled as two non-buoyant volumes Tanks within Compartments

When a tank is defined within a compartment, Hydromax will automatically deduct the volume of the tank from the compartment volume using a “linked neg. (negative) compartment”. This is necessary for damage cases where the compartment is flooded and the volume of the tank should be treated completely separately from the compartment. Linked negative compartments are deleted and recreated whenever a tank or compartment is added, deleted or modified. Negatively linked compartments are displayed on the bottom of the Compartment Definition table solely for reference purposes and are not under direct user control. This means that linked negative compartments cannot be added, deleted or modified. Page 54


Linked negative compartments are named based on both the parent compartment as well as the tank from which the linked negative compartment was derived. For example a linked negative compartment might be named “Compartment3 (Stbd Hydr Oil)” to reflect that it is derived from the intersection of Compartment3 with the Stbd Hydr Oil tank. Tanks Overlapping

As mentioned earlier in this manual, only compartments and non buoyant volumes or tanks can overlap with each other. Tanks or compartments of the same type (eg two tanks) can not overlap. A tank and a non-buoyant volume are also not allowed to overlap. Hydromax will first try to form tank sections and then check whether these sections overlap tank sections of adjacent tanks. When two conflicting or overlapping tanks or compartments are detected during the forming process, you will receive an error message:

Notice that the compartment definition row number of the tank is given in brackets i.e. tank #8 intersects tank #3.

Troubleshooting Overlapping Tanks Sometimes the reason for the conflict can be quite simple: eg an overlapping boundary box. However, when you are modelling tanks using boundary surfaces, the surface boundaries act as a boundary between two adjacent tanks and the bounding box extents are allowed to overlap. In these cases, it can be quite difficult to see why the tanks overlap, especially if you have a large number of tanks already defined.

By temporarily deleting all tanks except for the one that does not form, it often becomes clear why the tank overlaps. In the case of the image above, the tank‟s fwd most section goes all the way to the CL (probably because the fwd boundary box extent is just fwd of the boundary surfaces or exactly on the edge of a boundary surface). This causes this particular tank to “overlap” with surrounding tanks. Page 55


Procedure to Fix Overlapping Tanks: 

Save Model



Go into Comp def window



Save comp def



Delete all tanks except for one you wish to investigate



form tanks, inspect tank sections



Try to fix tank definition, eg by selecting additional boundary surfaces

Now that you know how to fix it.. 

Close comp def file. Do NOT save!!



Open saved Comp def file



Fix compartment.



Save & move on to next compartment.

Tank and Compartment Permeability

Tanks may have two permeabilities; one, which is used when the tank is intact, and the other when it is damaged. Compartments and non-buoyant volumes have only one permeability, thought it is listed in both columns. The compartment permeability is applied when the compartment is flooded in a damage condition and the non-buoyant volume permeability is applied at all times since it is always flooded. In the case of damaged tanks and compartments, the permeability fraction is also applied to the free-surface-moment contribution of that tank or compartment. Permeability of Compartments As opposed to tanks, compartments typically have structure (other than plate stiffeners) and equipment inside. In case of large variations in permeability within a compartment it is recommended to model separate linked compartments with separate permeability to increase accuracy. For example an engine room with engines and auxiliaries at the tanktop could be divided up in a lower- and an upper engine room compartment. The lower compartment will have a permeability of, for example, 60% and the upper compartment a permeability of 95%. Depending on the level of accuracy required, the engines and equipment could also be modelled individually as empty tanks. Relative Density of Tank Fluids

Relative Density (Specific Gravity) values can be typed directly into the Relative Density column of the Compartment Definition table.

Page 56


Alternatively the fluid type can be entered into the Fluid Type column, either as the name or as one of the single letter codes (when entering the name, auto complete is used, so it is normally only necessary to type the first few letter of the name). If a fluid type is entered, the relative density value is obtained from the value specified in the Density dialog. Whenever values are changed in the Density dialog (see Density of Fluids on page 140), all entries for that fluid in the compartment definition are automatically updated. If the tank defines a cargo tank that will carry different liquid cargoes, the default density specified here in the compartment definition may be overridden in the loadcases. Tanks and Surface Thickness

If you have specified that Hydromax should include the surface thickness, the tanks, compartments and non-buoyant volumes will correctly account for the surface thickness and its projection direction: the tanks will go to the inside of the hull shell. Note: Thickness of boundary surfaces are not taken into account, hence you should design these surfaces to the inside of the tank. Compartment and Tank Ordering

The tank definition order can be adjusted in a similar way to loads in the loadcase. Select the rows you wish to use and use the Edit | Move Items Up or Down commands (there is no provision for sorting tanks alphabetically). Groups of linked tanks and compartments will be moved together. Compartment and Tank Visibility

When creating complicated tank plans, it is often useful to check individual tanks. You can either control the tank visibility through the Assembly window, or if you prefer, you can use damage cases to quickly change the display to show certain tanks.

Assembly view can be used to show and hide tanks/compartments

Using damage cases, selected tanks may be displayed in the following manner:  

Define a damage case Select only damaged tanks and compartments for display, turn off the display of intact tanks and compartments.

Page 57




 

Select whether you want to see the tank outline or the tank sections (tanks sections are preferable when checking that tanks have been formed correctly since it is these sections which are used to determine the tank volume and other properties). Choose the damage case from the Analysis toolbar Set any of the tanks and compartments you wish to be visible to damaged in the damage case window.

You can make the damage case window quite small and tile it next to the perspective view. Use this to quickly turn tanks on and off by changing their damage status.

Using a damage case to quickly change the tank and compartment visibility

Tank sections

When in Tank Calibration mode, tank sections are also displayed in the Bodyplan view when the “Show single section” option is selected. Only tank sections that lie on or near the current station are shown – this makes it easier to verify that the tanks have been formed.

Page 58


Forming Compartments

Tanks and compartments are formed automatically by Hydromax (once the tank extents and any boundary surfaces have been defined) by selecting Recalculate Tanks and Compartments from the Analysis menu. The formed status of a tank (yes or no) is shown in the last column of the compartment definition table. This section describes the internal tank-forming process that Hydromax uses to form tanks. First a step-by-step outline of the tank forming process is given, followed by the tank section insertion process. Understanding these processes may assist you in rare situations where the tank forming does not work as expected. Step-by-Step Tank Forming Process

As an example, the starboard waterballast tank below will be created using boundary surfaces.

An example of a port and starboard waterballast tank with a pipe tunnel at the centreline. The water ballast tanks have a margin plate on the side.

Hydromax uses three input items to form the compartment Boundary surfaces (if defined) Boundary box Hydromax Hull sections

Starting position The starboard tank margin plate is modelled using an Internal Structure surface from Maxsurf.

Starting point: Hydromax Hull sections with an internal surface and a bounding box

Also see: Modelling Tanks Using Boundary Surfaces on page 51 and the Maxsurf manual on internal structure surfaces Page 59


Step 1: Close Internal Structure Surface

Hydromax will close the Internal Structure Surface contour by drawing a straight line between the ends of the opening.

Hydromax uses the same method for forming the tank section from the boundary surfaces as for forming the hydrostatic sections through the hull. As with the hull sections, the surfaces selected to form the tank boundary must form closed section contours at all longitudinal positions through the tank. The area inside the selected surfaces will define the tank contour. Make sure that the boundary surfaces: Form a closed section contour, or There is no more than one opening – the opening will be closed with a straight line

Note: Hydromax will close the section contour of the selected boundary surfaces only. Often a tank is not formed as expected because only one side of the internal structure surface was selected for example the portside (p). Another common cause of unexpected results is trimming. If you selected “use trimmed surfaces” while opening the Maxsurf model, Hydromax will use the trimmed internal structure surface. Usually the internal structure surfaces are best to be left untrimmed. Step 2: Clip to Boundary Surface Using the closed surface section contour Hydromax can now form a closed compartment section. The tank or compartment looks like this at this stage:

Page 60


Step 3: Clip to Hull Hydromax will clip the compartment section to the hull.

Step 4: Clip to Boundary Box Finally the compartment section is clipped to the boundary box. The boundary box is formed from the numerical input in the Compartment definition table.

More realistic surface-bounded tanks

Whilst the above example shows the principles by which surface-bounded tanks are formed, it is not really realistic because it would not be possible to define a tank above the surface-bounded double bottom tanks. In practice additional surfaces would be required. A more realistic example is shown in the following section. In this example the vessel has both wing and double bottom tanks with non-rectangular cross-sections thus requiring them to be defined by boundary surfaces – see blow:

Page 61


Sketch of tank cross-sections

Five surfaces have been defined to define the tank boundaries:

Tank Boundary surfaces defined in Maxsurf

The following surfaces need to be selected for the different tanks so that closed sections are generated (or at most one section) Hold (C) TankWing, TankWing (P), TankTop, TankTop (P) Double Bottom (P) TankTop (P), BottomClosure (P), TankBilgePlate (P) Double Bottom (S) TankTop (S), BottomClosure (S), TankBilgePlate (S) Wing Ballast (P) TankWing (P), OuterClosure (P), TankBilgePlate (P) Wing Ballast (S) TankWing (S), OuterClosure (S), TankBilgePlate (S)

Page 62


Hydromax tank definition

Surfaces for Hold (C) (top is closed automatically)

Page 63


Surfaces for double bottom tanks

Surfaces for wing tanks (top is closed automatically)

Number of Sections in Tanks

The volume of a tank or compartments is calculated by integrating section properties along the length of the tank. Thus it is important to have a sufficiently large number of sections to accurately model the tank. Hydromax will normally place twelve sections between the forward and aft limits defining the tank. If this results in a section spacing greater than the spacing for the hull spacing, additional sections will be inserted into the tank so that the tank section spacing match the hull section spacing. Also see Longitudinal Extents of Boundary Box on page 64 Longitudinal Extents of Boundary Box

For tanks near the ship‟s extremities it is good practise to set the “Fore” and “Aft” limits in the compartment table to just inside the hull surface (say 1mm). In most cases, this will be done automatically by Hydromax. The following example illustrates why: Page 64


If the boundary box is set like this:

The number of hull sections is dependent on the section spacing in the model.

But if the boundary box is set just inside the forward limit of the bulbous bow:

To recap – Near the ship‟s extremities, the longitudinal extents should not be set to extreme values, they should be set to just inside the extents of the hull surfaces to ensure that at least 12 sections are used to calculate the tank volumes. For internal structure surfaces that are used as boundary surface, Hydromax will automatically set the “Fore” and “Aft” limits of the boundary box to just within the longitudinal limits of the boundary surface. This ensures that at least 12 sections are inserted in the tank. Note that transversely and vertically there are no such restrictions. Also see Number of Sections in Tanks on page 64 Forming Compartments on page 59 Compartment Types

Five compartment types can be created using the Compartment Definition table - tanks, linked tanks, compartments, linked compartments and non-buoyant volumes.

Page 65


Tanks Will be included in the tank calibration output and are automatically added to the loadcase. Linked Tanks Will have their volume added to the parent tank with the same tank name. They do not have a separate entry in the loadcase. In addition, if a tank is damaged, any tank that it is linked to will also be regarded as damaged. Tanks need not be adjoining to be linked, they can be remote from one another. In this case the tank linking simulates tanks with cross connections. Compartments Are only used to specify compartmentation for damage. They are not included in the tank calibration output and will not be added to the loadcase. Linked Compartments Work in the same way as linked tanks. This allows you to damage a complex compartment configuration by linking compartments together and damaging the parent compartment. Non-Buoyant Volumes Are only used to specify compartments of the vessel which are permanently flooded up to the static waterline. They are ideal for defining water-jet ducts, moon pools, etc. and essentially behave as damaged compartments. They are not included in the tank calibration output and will not be added to the loadcase. To change the type of a tank, type the first character of the tank type (t, c or n) in the Type column of the Compartment Definition table and then press Enter. This will automatically set the tank/compartment to the correct type. Sounding Pipes

Hydromax allows sounding pipes to be defined for each tank. One sounding pipe per tank is permitted and up to nine vertices per sounding pipe, allowing inclined, bent or curved sounding pipes to be modelled. Hydromax creates a default sounding pipe when the tank is formed (either by running an analysis, or using one of the following commands: Analysis | Recalculate Tanks and Compartments; or Analysis | Update Loadcase. The default sounding pipe is placed at the longitudinal and transverse position of the lowest point of the tank. If the lowest point of the tank is shared between several locations (e.g. the bottom of the tank is flat either longitudinally or transversely) the default sounding pipe location is placed at the aft-most low point and as close to the centreline as possible. The top of the sounding pipe is taken to be level with the highest point of the tank and the default sounding pipe is assumed to be straight and vertical. Automatically created sounding pipes will be recalculated if the tank geometry changes. However, once the sounding pipe has been edited manually, any changes to the sounding pipe due to tank geometry changes will also have to be made manually. Edit Sounding Pipes

To customise a sounding pipe, you need to use the Sounding Pipes table in the Input window, shown below.

Page 66


You can activate this window by selecting from the Windows | Input | Sounding Pipes menu, by clicking on the tabs at the bottom of the Input window, or by clicking on the icon in the window toolbar. To add vertices to create a bent sounding pipe, make the sounding pipe type User Defined, then click on the first row of a particular sounding pipe and choose Edit | Add or use the Ctrl+A key combination. A new row will be added to the sounding pipe and the longitudinal position, offset and height of the vertex can be edited. Unwanted vertices can be deleted by clicking on the relevant row in the table and selecting Edit | Delete or by hitting the Delete key. Note that each successive vertex in a sounding pipe must be no higher than the previous vertex i.e. it is not acceptable to have S-bends in the sounding pipes. Calibration Increment

Hydromax allows user definable increments (or: intervals) for tank soundings. This is done by specifying a numerical value for the increment for each tank in the Calibration Spacing column of the Sounding Pipes Input window.



Type the value of the desired calibration increment in the Calibration Spacing cell for the tank calibration you wish to modify.

If no increment is entered, Hydromax uses its default value based on a reasonable division of the depth of the tank. In this case the Sounding Pipes table will display “Auto” in the Calibration Increment column for the tank.

Page 67


Note Increments are measured along the sounding pipe, not along the vertical axis of the tank. If the sounding pipe is inclined or if it has multiple angles, soundings will step evenly along the inclined length of the sounding pipe. Damage Case Definition

In all but the floodable length and tank calibration analysis modes, Hydromax is capable of including the effects of user-defined damage. Hydromax allows the user to set up a number of damage cases. Volumes that are permanently flooded should be defined as non-buoyant volumes. Adding a Damage Case

To add a damage case, make the Damage window active and select Add Damage Case from the Case menu. You may specify a name for the Damage Case in the dialog. Each new damage case will have a column in the Damage Window and a tick may be placed to indicate which tanks and compartments are damaged for that particular Damage Case. The new damage case is added after the currently selected damage case column, to insert a damage case immediately after the intact case, select the intact case column. Several damage cases may be added in one go by selecting a number of columns.

Deleting a Damage Case

To delete damage cases, simply select the columns to be deleted in the Damage Window and select Delete Damage Case from the Case menu. Note that it is not possible to delete the intact case. Renaming a Damage Case

The name of the current damage case may be changed by selecting Edit Damage Case when the damage case window is active, the current damage case is selected from the Analysis toolbar – see below.

Page 68


Selecting a Damage Case

The current damage case is selected from the Analysis toolbar.

The Loadcase and View windows will reflect the damage defined in the current damage case. To perform analyses for the intact vessel, select Intact as the current damage case. Any subsequent analyses will take into account the damaged compartments. Note that carrying out a Tank Calibration analysis will force the intact case to be selected. This is also the case for the Floodable Length analysis which effectively sets up its own longitudinal extent of damage. When tanks have been damaged, their weights and levers are no longer displayed in the Loadcase window and the word „Damage‟ is displayed in the quantity column. This is because Hydromax uses the “Lost buoyancy” method rather than “Added mass”. Note: Hydromax uses the “Lost buoyancy” method rather than “Added mass”. Flooding is considered to be instantaneous up to sea level. Any tank fluids are treated as having been completely replaced by seawater up to the equilibrium waterline. Hydromax assumes that all compartment definition has been done after the tanks have been defined. If you have linked tanks or compartments or added tanks within compartments after the definition of a damage case, you should toggle the damage status of the damaged tanks. This is simply done by copying all the damage case data to a spread sheet, turning off all damage in all the damage cases (use the fill down command) and then pasting back in the original data from where it was stored in the spreadsheet. Displaying Damage Cases

When a damage case is selected, all damaged tanks and compartments will be displayed in damaged tank or damaged compartment colour respectively. These colours can be specified in the View | Colours and lines menu. In the Loadcase Window damaged tanks are displayed with the label 'Damaged' in the Quantity column, and all values set to zero.

Page 69


The Loadcase Window displays damaged tanks and excludes them from any calculations. Extent of Damage Cases

The damaged compartments can automatically be set by using the Case | Extent of damage command. Select the column of the damage case you wish to specify the extent of damage for and choose Extent of Damage from the case menu:

Page 70


Defining the damaged compartments by specify the extent of damage.

Specify the extent of the damage – any tanks or compartments that lie partially or wholly within the extent of damage will be automatically flagged as damaged:

Automatically generated damage case from using Extent of Damage command.

Key Points (e.g. Down Flooding Points)

Key points such as downflooding points and hatch openings can be defined in Hydromax using the Key Points window. The points may be displayed in the Design View window and will be displayed in different colours depending on whether or not they are immersed. Immersed key points will be displayed in the same colour as flooded tanks or compartments. Key points may be placed asymmetrically, a positive offset is to starboard and a negative offset is to port. Vessels which have symmetrical key points on starboard and port sides must have both key points added to the table. There are several types of Key Points: Down Flooding points Potential Down flooding points Embarkation points Immersion Points

Only downflooding points are used in determining the downflooding angle, which is used in criteria evaluation. The other types of points have their freeboard measured but are not used for the evaluation of the downflooding angle and are for information only. Adding Key Points

To start adding downflooding points go to the Key Points table, select New Key Points from the File menu. You will be given a default point. To add additional key points to the table, choose Add from the Edit menu or press Ctrl+A. A new point will be inserted below the currently selected row in the table. Deleting Key Points

To delete a Key point, click anywhere in the row of the point to be deleted and select Delete. To delete more than one point at a time, click and drag over the rows you want deleted.

Page 71


Select Delete from the Edit menu, and the selected rows will be deleted. Editing Key Points

Key points are defined by entering a name, a longitudinal position, a transverse offset from the centreline, and a height. Click in any cell and enter the name or value you require. All points are entered relative to the zero point. The type of Key Point may be selected from the combo-box in the Type column of the Down Flooding Points table in the Input window:

Links to Tanks or Compartments

Downflooding points may be linked to tanks or compartments. Select the tank or compartment from the combo-box in the Linked to column of the Down Flooding Points table in the Input window:

Downflooding points that are linked to tanks or compartments, which are damaged in the currently selected damage case, will be ignored when computing the downflooding angle. These downflooding points will appear italicised and an asterisk (*) is postfixed to the downflooding point‟s name in the DF Angles table of the Results window:

Page 72


The downflooding angles for each of the points are displayed in the results window. The downflooding angles are computed during a large angle stability analysis; the freeboards after an Equilibrium or Specified Condition analysis. Immersed points are highlighted in red in the Freeboard column. In addition to the Key Points results, immersion angles or freeboards (depending on the analysis) are also given for the margin line and deck edge. In the Name column the longitudinal position where immersion first takes place (or the lowest freeboard) is given. Note: Linking a downflooding point to a tank does not mean that Hydromax will consider a tank damaged when the downflooding point is submerged. This form of automatic flooding is not supported in Hydromax yet. Margin Line Points

The margin line is used in a number of the criteria. Hydromax automatically calculates the position of the margin line 76mm below the deck edge when the hull is first read in. If necessary, the points on the margin line may be edited manually in the Margin Line Points window (the deck edge is automatically updated so that it is kept 76mm above the margin line). It is only necessary to modify the height value of the margin line points. Once this has been done for all the points that need to be changed, selecting Snap Margin Line to Hull in the Analysis menu will project all of the points horizontally onto the hull surface, ensuring that the margin line follows the hull shape precisely. Asymmetric margin lines and deck edges are not supported. Points may be added or deleted as required using the procedure described in Adding Key Points and Deleting Key Points on page 71. Modulus Points and Allowable Shears and Moments

The Modulus window can be used to enter maximum allowable shear forces and bending moments for each section. One or more points can be entered in this window. Allowable shear force and/or bending moment can be specified at each point. The modulus value is not currently used as deflections are not calculated.

Page 73


To start a table of allowable shear forces and bending moments, bring the Modulus table to the front and choose New Modulus Points from the File menu with the Modulus window frontmost. The allowable values can be saved and recalled as text files by using Open and Save from the File menu. New allowable values can be inserted by selecting Add from the Edit menu and entering a longitudinal position as well as an allowable shear and/or moment. Points may be added or deleted as required using the procedure described for the key points. These allowable values are displayed as lines on the longitudinal strength graph. Floodable Length Bulkheads

Bulkheads entered in the Input window are used for Floodable Length analysis in order to optionally plot the compartment lengths in the floodable length graph for easy verification that the critical compartment lengths are not exceeded. The Bulkheads are automatically sorted by longitudinal position. For more information see Floodable Length on page 99. Stability Criteria

Stability criteria may be evaluated after a Large Angle Stability analysis and after an Equilibrium analysis. Stability criteria are required to perform a limiting KG and Floodable Length analysis. Please refer to Chapter 4 Stability Criteria starting at page 153 for information on defining and selecting criteria.

Analysis Types After specifying the input values and checking the Hydromax model, the analysis can be performed. In this section the different analysis types available in Hydromax will be described. The following analysis types are available in Hydromax: Upright Hydrostatics Large Angle Stability Equilibrium Analysis Specified Conditions KN Values Analysis Limiting KG Floodable Length Longitudinal Strength Tank Calibrations

Also, some general information is given on: Starting and Stopping Analyses Batch Analysis

The required analysis settings and environment options will be discussed separately and in more detail in the next two sections of this chapter. Page 74


Following each analysis, one or more graphs may be shown – select the graph to be displayed from the pull-down menu in the Graph window. The Data Format dialog can be used to specify what is displayed in some graphs and tables; the available options depends on the current results table or graph:

Data format dialog for Upright hydrostatics table and graph

Upright Hydrostatics

Upright hydrostatics lets you determine the hydrostatic parameters of the hull at a range of drafts, at zero or other fixed trim. Choosing Upright Hydrostatics

Select Upright Hydrostatics from the Analysis Type option in the Analysis menu or toolbar. Upright Hydrostatic Analysis Settings

The following analysis settings apply for Upright Hydrostatic Analysis: Draft from the Analysis menu, specify range of drafts for analysis Trim from the Analysis menu, you may specify a fixed trim for all drafts

A range of drafts for upright hydrostatic calculations can be specified using the Drafts command from the Analysis menu.

Initial and final drafts can be entered, together with the number of drafts to be used. The Vertical Centre of Gravity is also required for the calculation of GM etc. This is specified as KG, i.e. from the baseline, which is not necessarily the vertical zero datum. Page 75


When a design is first opened, the initial draft defaults to the draft at the DWL in Maxsurf. Similarly the VCG defaults to the height of the DWL. Upright Hydrostatics Environment Options

The following environments can be applied to the upright hydrostatics analysis: Density from the Analysis menu Wave Form (if any) Damage (or Intact) from the Analysis toolbar

Upright Hydrostatic Results

Page 76


The curves of form are shown on a separate graph and the sectional area may be show for any of the drafts: see Select View from Analysis Data on page 148. Large Angle Stability

Large angle stability lets you determine the hydrostatic parameters of the hull at a range of heel angles either with or without trim or free-to-trim. Choosing Large Angle Stability

Select Large Angle Stability from the Analysis menu or toolbar. Large Angle Stability Settings

The following analysis settings apply for Large Angle Stability Analysis: Displacement and Centre of Gravity using the Loadcase window Heel from the Analysis menu, select range for analysis Trim (fixed or free) from the Analysis menu

If criteria are being evaluated, the heel range and heel angle steps should be chosen accordingly, to ensure accurate evaluation of the criteria.

Page 77


Note You can select positive heel direction (port or starboard). However, you can enter negative values and test full 360 degrees of stability if you wish. Some criteria require calculations of GZ at negative heel. The criteria are only evaluated on the side of the graph that corresponds to positive heel angles. For example: when using a -180 to 180 heel range, the results may be two angles of vanishing stability, the one that would be reported in the criteria would be the one with a positive heel angle (even if the one at negative heel occurred at an angle closer to zero). Also see: Heel on page 131 in the Analysis Settings section. Large Angle Stability Environment Options

The following environments can be applied to the large angle stability analysis: Fluid simulation of tank fluids centre of gravity Density Wave Form (if any) Damage (or Intact) from the Analysis toolbar Stability Criteria Large Angle Stability Results

Large Angle Stability Analysis results are: Hydrostatic data table for each angle of heel GZ curve Dynamic stability (GZ area) curve Graph of hydrostatic parameters against heel angle Graph of max. safe steady heel angle Stability Criteria evaluation Downflooding angles to key points, deck edge and margin line Curve of areas at each heel angle

Page 78


Dynamic stability Graph A graph of the GZ area integrated from upright may be plotted, features such as downflooding angle are also included on the graph. Curve of Areas Shows the curve of areas for the currently selected heel angle (use Display | Select view from data to chose the heel angle from the GZ results table). Large Angle stability Graph; Curves of Form; Shows the variation of hydrodynamic properties with heel angle. Graph of maximum safe steady heeling angles for sailing vessels These calculations are derived from the value of GZ at a critical heel angle, for example the angle of downflooding or angle of deck edge immersion. Once a GZ curve has been calculated, you can display the maximum safe heeling angle curves by selecting the graph type in the pull-down menu.

Page 79


The parameters for the calculation can be modified in the Display | Data Format dialog (this graph must be selected in the topmost window):

Page 80


Analysis options for the calculation of Maximum steady heel angles (Display | Data Format).

The first part of the dialog is almost exactly the same as the “Angle of equilibrium - derived wind heeling arm” criterion. This allows you to specify the critical condition that should not be exceeded due to a gust or squall. MCA require downflooding but you can include additional criteria if desired. You can also change the shape of the heeling arm curve and the gust ratio. In the lower-left, you can specify the squall wind speeds (you can add any number) The default gives three wind speeds of 30, 45 and 60kts. Finally you can adjust the axis limits. This is because normally you will have computed a GZ curve for a wider heel range than you would wish to display in this graph – it is uncommon to sail a vessel with a steady heel angle of greater than 40 degrees. It can often be useful to duplicate this criterion in the GZ criteria that are evaluated. This will give you the same result as for the gust limiting line.

Page 81


The same safe angle of heel to prevent downflooding in the event of a gust (16.5 deg) is found.

To obtain smooth curves, the GZ curve should be calculated at small intervals of heel, especially at the lower heel angles – typically steps of 1degree. Under some circumstances, it may not be possible to evaluate the curves, the most common reason for this is that the GZ curve has not been calculated up to a sufficiently high angle of heel and downflooding angle cannot be found. Full details of the calculations can be found in:

Page 82


Sailing Yacht Design: Practice. ed. Claughton, Wellicome and Shenoi. Adison Wesley Longman 1998. ISBN 0-582-36857-X STABILITY INFORMATION BOOKLET available from the MCA. www.mcga.gov.uk Stability Criteria Evaluation The criteria results are displayed in the Criteria tab in the results window. For more information on how to customize the display of the criteria results, please refer to the Results Window on page 175 in the reference section. Important: For important information on varying displacement while evaluating criteria, see: Important note: heeling arm criteria dependent on displacement on page 226. Downflooding Angle After a Large Angle Stability analysis, the Key Points Data table lists the downflooding angles of the margin line, deck edge and defined Key Points. In addition, the first downflooding point is marked on the large angle stability graph. Only the positive downflooding angles are displayed, hence if there is any asymmetry, the large angle stability analysis should be carried out heeling both to starboard and to port. For the margin line and deck edge the longitudinal position at which immersion first occurred is provided.

Downflooding points that are linked to tanks or compartments that are damaged in the currently selected damage case, will be ignored when computing the downflooding angle. These downflooding points will appear italicised, and an asterisk (*) is postfixed to the downflooding point‟s name in the Key Point Data table of the Results window. Emergence angles of the key points is also calculated – this is where they cross the waterline in an upward direction to become dry; as opposed to the immersion angle which is when the cross the waterline in a downward direction, becoming wet. A downflooding angle of zero degrees indicates that the key point is immersed at zero degrees of heel. Also see: Select View from Analysis Data on page 148.

Page 83


Equilibrium Analysis

Equilibrium analysis lets you determine the draft, heel and trim of the hull as a result of the loads applied in the table in the Loadcase window. The analysis can be carried out in flat water or in a waveform. Choosing Equilibrium Analysis

Select Equilibrium from the Analysis Type option in the Analysis menu. Equilibrium Analysis Settings

Displacement and Centre of Gravity using the Loadcase window

Also see: Setting the Frame of Reference on page 17 Equilibrium Analysis Environment Options

The following environments can be applied to the Equilibrium analysis: Fluid simulation of tank fluid centre of gravity Density Wave Form (if any) Damage (or Intact) from the Analysis toolbar Grounding (if any) Criteria

Equilibrium Results

Equilibrium Results are: Hydrostatic data Freeboard of key points, deck edge and margin line Criteria evaluation Wave phase animation Curve of areas

Page 84


Hydrostatic data

Height/freeboard above free surface The freeboard of each Key Point is also calculated. The freeboard is for the vessel condition currently displayed in the Design view and is recalculated after each Equilibrium and Specified Conditions analysis. The freeboard calculated is the vertical distance of the Key Point above the local free surface; hence the local free surface height if a waveform is selected will be taken into account.

Freeboard of key points.

Negative freeboards, i.e. where the Key Points are immersed are displayed in red. The longitudinal positions at which the minimum freeboard for the margin line and deck edge occurred are also specified. Stability Criteria Evaluation The criteria results are displayed in the Criteria tab in the results window.

Page 85


Equilibrium Animation in Waves If performed in conjunction with analysis in waves, the Equilibrium analysis will automatically phase-step the waveform through a complete wavelength. This gives ten columns of results, one for each position of the wave crest. If necessary the results of this phase stepping can be animated giving a simple, quasi-static simulation of the hull motion in waves (Display | Animate). Note: This simulation only includes static behaviour at each wave phase, and does not cover dynamic or inertial forces. This can be done using Seakeeper. Equilibrium Concept

The definition of equilibrium is “Position or state where object will remain if undisturbed”. You can distinguish equilibrium into two types: Stable, when disturbed the object will return to its equilibrium position Unstable, when disturbed the object will not return to its equilibrium position

Stable equilibrium

Unstable equilibrium

With ships, an unstable equilibrium can exist when the KG > KM, i.e. the centre of gravity is above the metacentre (negative GMt). In real world a ship in unstable equilibrium will roll from the upright unstable equilibrium position to a position of stable equilibrium and assume an “angle of loll”. Since Hydromax starts the equilibrium analysis in upright position, it has no way of determining whether the equilibrium is stable or unstable. This means that unstable equilibrium may be found instead of the stable equilibrium. Therefore it is recommend to check the value of GMt yourself after doing an equilibrium analysis or perform a Large Angle Stability analysis and look at the slope of the GZ curve through the equilibrium heel angle.

Page 86


Unstable equilibrium

Stable equilibrium ”Angle of loll”

The graph above shows the results of a Large Angle Stability analysis for a vessel with negative initial GMt. In practice this vessel would have a loll angle of approximately 25 degrees. If an equilibrium analysis is performed for this vessel with the transverse arm set to zero, Hydromax will find the unstable equilibrium position with zero degrees of heel. In practice, it is desirable to find the stable equilibrium position. To do this, first ensure that the tolerances (Edit | Add Surface Areas This command automatically adds the surface areas and centres of gravity of all hull surfaces into the current loading condition. This is useful for estimating the initial weight of hull plating. Activate / Deactivate GHS Export

This command activates the GHS Import command in the File menu if a Hydrolink License is available. It can also be used to release the Hydrolink license – a restart of Hydromax will be required for this to take effect. Preferences) are set as sensitive as possible. This will ensure that the smallest possible heeling moment is required to find stable equilibrium position. Then create a very small heeling moment by offsetting one of the weight items in the loadcase window TCG by just a fraction. The equilibrium analysis will now find the stable equilibrium position. Note: It is good practice to always perform a Large Angle Stability analysis as well as the equilibrium analysis to check if the vessel is in stable or unstable equilibrium. This is most likely to occur if the VCG is too high and the vessel has negative GM when upright. The problem can be overcome by offsetting the weight of the vessel transversely by a small amount.

Page 87


Specified Conditions

Specified Condition analysis lets you determine the hydrostatic parameters of the vessel by specifying the heel, trim and immersion. Heel can be specified by either the angle of heel or the TCG and VCG. Trim can be specified by the actual trim measurement, or the LCG and VCG. Immersion can be specified by either the displacement or the draft. Choosing Specified Conditions

Select Specified Conditions from the Analysis Type option in the Analysis menu or toolbar. Specified Conditions Settings

The settings required for Specified Condition analysis are: Specified Conditions from the Analysis menu

Three Sets of variables are provided, labelled Heel, Trim and Immersion. One choice must be made from each of these groups. Hydromax will then solve for the vessel hydrostatics at the conditions specified.

Values from the current loading condition can be inserted into the Centre of Gravity and Displacement fields by clicking on the Get Loadcase Values button. Also see: Setting the Frame of Reference on page 17 Specified Conditions on page 135 in the Analysis Settings section. Note: If the fluid simulation has been turned on in a previous analysis mode, then the VCG obtained from the loadcase will not include the free surface correction; the “Get Loadcase Values” button will return exactly the displacement and CG as displayed in the current loadcase window. The specified condition analysis itself ignores tank fillings and does no correction to VCG. Specified Conditions Environment Options

The following environments can be applied to the Specified Condition analysis:

Page 88


Density Wave Form (if any) Damage (or Intact) from the Analysis toolbar

Specified Conditions Results

The specified conditions results are the same as equilibrium analysis results except that criteria are not evaluated, i.e. hydrostatic data and key points freeboard are calculated. KN Values Analysis

KN Values Analysis allows you to determine the hydrostatic properties of the hull at a range of heel angles and displacements to produce the cross curves of stability diagram. Choosing KN Values Analysis

Select KN Values from the Analysis Type option in the Analysis menu or toolbar. KN Values Analysis Settings

The analysis settings required for KN Values analysis are: Heel from the Analysis menu, select range for analysis Trim (fixed or free) from the Analysis menu Displacement from the Analysis menu, select range for analysis and specify estimate of VCG if known

The heel angles used may differ from those used in the Large Angle Stability and Limiting KG analyses. To set the range of angles, select Heel from the Analysis menu. A range of displacements for KN calculations can be specified using the Displacement command from the Analysis menu. Initial and final displacements can be entered, together with the number of displacements required.

Displacement range dialog

Page 89


Trim dialog

The VCG can also be entered (specified from the vertical zero datum). Traditionally, KN calculations are calculated assuming the VCG at the baseline (K). However if the analysis is being calculated free-to-trim and an estimate of the VCG is known, the accuracy of the KN calculations (for VCGs in the vicinity of the estimated VCG) may be improved by calculating the GZ curve using the estimated VCG position – this will reduce the error in the trim balance due to the vertical separation of CG and CB because this vertical separation is specified more accurately than simply assuming the VCG at the baseline. If a VCG estimate is specified, the KN values are still presented in the normal manner with the KN values calculated as follows: KN(φ) = GZ(φ) + KG_estimated sin(φ) For information on Trim settings for KN Analysis, see: Trim on page 132 Also see KN Value Concepts on page 91 KN Values Analysis Environment Options

Density Wave Form (if any) Damage (or Intact) from the Analysis toolbar

Page 90


KN Values Analysis Results

KN curves calualated at each heel angle

Immersion angles calculated at each displacement KN Value Concepts

The righting lever, GZ, may be calculated from the KN cross curves of stability (at the desired displacement) for any specified KG using the following equation: . GZ = KN - KG sin(φ)

Page 91


M

Z G

B’ B

N

K

Note: KN values can also be referred to as “Cross curves of stability”. Limiting KG

Limiting KG analysis allows you to analyse the hull at a range of displacements to determine the highest value of KG that satisfies the selected stability criteria. GZ curves are calculated for various KG values. After each cycle, the selected criteria are evaluated to determine whether the CG may be raised or must be lowered. When comparing the results of a limiting KG analysis to that of a Large Angle Stability analysis, it is essential that the same heel angle intervals are used and that the free-totrim options and CG are the same. Some criteria, notably angle of maximum GZ, are extremely sensitive to the heel angle intervals that have been chosen. Choosing Limiting KG

Select Limiting KG from the Analysis Type option in the Analysis menu or toolbar. Limiting KG Settings

The initial conditions required for Limiting KG analysis are: Displacement from the Analysis menu, select range for analysis Heel from the Analysis menu, select range for calculation of GZ curves Trim (fixed or free) from the Analysis menu

The range of displacements to be used is set in the same way as they are set in the KN analysis. The heel angles used may differ from those used in the Large Angle Stability and KN analyses. To set the range of angles, select Heel from the Analysis menu. See Large Angle Stability on page 77 for further details. For information on Trim settings for Limiting KG Analysis, see: Trim on page 132

Page 92


Note: Since Limiting KG can be quite a time consuming analysis, you may wish to use a smaller number of heel angles than for the Large Angle Stability calculations. (However this will cause some loss of accuracy.) Limiting KG calculations will be significantly faster if the trim is fixed. Limiting KG Environment Options

Density Wave Form (if any) Damage (or Intact) from the Analysis toolbar Criteria

Limiting KG Results

Limiting KG analysis results are Limiting KG values, for each displacement and the limiting criterion. Limiting KG vs displacement graph

The Limiting KG value is measured from the baseline, which is not necessarily the same as the zero point. As well as the limiting KG, the minimum GM, draft amidships, trim and centre of gravity are given in the results table. The Limiting KG analysis also checks that any selected equilibrium based criteria are passed at each VCG that it tries. However, you must still have at least one Large Angle Stability criterion selected. Criteria are only evaluated on the positive side of the GZ curve, so if there is any form of asymmetry, it may be necessary to run the analysis heeling the vessel to both starboard and port (this can be done automatically in the Batch Analysis).

Page 93


After a Limiting KG analysis has completed, the results in the Criteria results table display “Not Analysed”, this is because they do not necessarily refer to the final KG and would be misleading. If you require the limiting KG for each criterion individually or wish to perform a Large Angle Stability and Equilibrium analysis at each of the displacements and the corresponding limiting KG, this can be done in the Batch Analysis. Some criteria may depend on the vessel displacement and or vessel‟s VCG. Where these values are explicit in the criterion‟s definition in Hydromax, the correct values of displacement and VCG will be used in the evaluation of these criteria. However, problems can arise if the criterion is only available in its generic form – most commonly heeling arm criteria where the heeling arm is specified simply as a lever and not as a moment. In this case, since the heeling arm is not related to the vessel displacement in its definition within Hydromax, the heeling arm will remain constant for all displacements (where it is perhaps desired that the heeling arm should vary with displacement. For example in the case where the heeling moment, rather than the heeling arm is constant). Important: For important information on varying displacement while evaluating criteria see Important note: heeling arm criteria dependent on displacement on page 226. Also see: Convergence Error on page 136 in the Analysis Settings section. Limiting KG Concepts

Hydromax will iterate to a KG value that just passes all criteria you have specified in the criteria dialog. Hydromax will start with a set start KG value (e.g. 1 meter), run a large angle stability analysis and check the selected criteria. If any of the criteria fail, Hydromax will lower the KG and try again. If the criteria pass, Hydromax will raise the KG value and try to make the criteria fail. Hydromax will continue doing this until the limiting KG value has been iterated to within 0.1mm. If this tolerance is not achieved in a certain number of iterations, Hydromax will move on to the next displacement.

Page 94


When performing a Limiting KG analysis, Hydromax will evaluate any equilibriumbased criteria that are selected for testing and act accordingly. However, at least one GZbased criterion must also be selected. This is because to perform a sensible search, Hydromax must have at least one criterion that will improve by reducing the VCG; Hydromax assumes that raising the VCG will make criteria more likely to fail and that reducing the VCG will make the criteria more likely to pass. This is not necessarily the case for equilibrium-based criteria such as freeboard requirements or for GZ-based criteria such as Angle of maximum GZ; if only these types of criteria are selected, Hydromax may have difficulty in finding a true limiting KG and specify convergence errors. Limiting KG for damage conditions with initially loaded tanks

The set up of the Limiting KG analysis parameters has been modified to facilitate setting up the required TCG when calculating the Limiting KG for a damaged vessel where liquid cargo tanks initially carrying cargo or ballast water are damaged. Hydromax assumes that damaged tanks lose all liquid cargo or ballast that they may have been carrying and their buoyancy is lost from the vessel – analysis is done by the lost buoyancy method rather than the added mass method. For Limiting KG calculations for a damaged vessel where some of the damaged tanks were initially non-empty, it is often required to specify a required TCG. This is because under most circumstances, the intact vessel is upright (zero heel). The tanks would generally provide a transverse moment that must be balanced by the mass of the vessel, which must therefore be offset. Note that we are only concerned about the tanks that will be damaged and that initially contain cargo or ballast; this is because when they are damaged the ballast or cargo is assumed to be totally lost from the vessel. (Although seawater enters these damaged areas, this is not seen as an additional mass because damage is computed by the lost buoyancy method.) Two methods of specifying the required TCG are possible. The second method was available in older versions of Hydromax and it is the first method that provides the additional functionality: 1. Current loadcase specifies initial loading of damaged tanks: This means that the currently selected Loadcase will be used to define the volume of cargo or ballast in tanks before damage is applied. If this method is selected Hydromax will look at the mass and CG of cargo or ballast in tanks which will be damaged during the analysis. This is used to compute required TCG. Note that all results and input data will be assumed to be for the intact vessel. That is the specified displacement will be that of the intact vessel and that the resulting LCG, TCG and KG will also be for the intact vessel. If the vessel has an off-centre intact TCG, this can be specified below (if the vessel is symmetrical and initially upright, this should be zero). 2. The second option is for the used to specify the required TCG directly. This functionality has been in Hydromax for many years. In this case, however the specified displacement and CG corresponds to that of the intact vessel with damaged tanks empty. i.e. the mass and CG of the intact vessel after deducting the masses of cargo or ballast in any tanks that will be damaged. Example calculations

It is probably simplest to explain this functionality by means of an example.

Page 95


The following sample calculations demonstrate how the new Limiting KG options may be used. A vessel with a port-side tank that are initially full will have this tank damaged. We wish to find the maximum VCG that the intact vessel may have in order to pass the selected stability criteria. Initial tank loadings

First we need to define how much cargo is in the tanks that will be damaged. This is done by defining a loadcase and switching to the intact mode to specify the tank filling levels. Here we have specified that the tank is 80% full before the damage is applied.

Use a loadcase to specify the initial quantities of fluids in tanks Setting the Displacements

Secondly we need to define the displacement range we wish to calculate the Limiting KG for. This is done in the Displacements dialog:

Displacement dialog Setting the Trim options

We now need to specify the trim options we wish to use. In this case we shall use free to trim, but with an initial vessel trim of 0.25m by the stern. Importantly we shall also specify that the current loadcase should be used to determine the required TCG and because the vessel is symmetrical, the specified TCG is zero:

Page 96


Trim and TCG specification Running the Analysis

We now need to select the damage case to be evaluated, the stability criteria that need to be passed and a suitable range of heel angles to be computed to evaluate the criteria. We also need to determine which way we should heel the vessel and in doubt should try heeling the vessel in both directions to see which will give the worst result. In this case large port-side tanks are to be damaged; these are filled significantly above the waterline so loss of ballast from these tanks will cause a list to Starboard, so the analysis should be done in this direction. Results from Limiting KG analysis

Limiting KG results Validation of results

The results can be validated by completing a Large Angle Stability analysis with the specified displacement and CG. It must be remembered that these are KG results not VCG so when checking the VCG must be calculated. In this case the baseline (K) is at – 356.845mm

Page 97


Model baseline

Computed VCG values

We can now set up a loadcase for one of the displacements. Remember that these are the intact vessel displacement and CG:

Loadcase to check calculated Limiting KG

When the analysis is run, it can be seen that (as expected) the stability criterion is passed with a very small margin.

Page 98


Criterion is passed with a small margin

Floodable Length

The Floodable Length analysis allows you to calculate the longitudinal distribution of maximum length of compartments that can be flooded with the vessel still passing specified equilibrium criteria. The results are presented as the maximum length of compartment plotted (or tabulated) against the longitudinal position of the compartment‟s centre. Traditionally the criterion of margin line immersion is used to compute the Floodable Length curve. The Floodable Length may be computed for a range of displacements and compartment permeabilities. Choosing Floodable Length 

Select Floodable Length from the Analysis Type option in the Analysis menu or toolbar.

Floodable Length Analysis Settings

The initial conditions required for Floodable Length analysis are: Trim (free-to-trim, either initial trim or specified LCG) Displacement, select range and specify VCG Permeability, select range Bulkhead location (if applicable)

1. The analysis is always carried out free-to-trim, but the centre of gravity can either be specified directly in the Trim dialog or it is computed from the specified initial trim. For information on Trim settings for Floodable Length Analysis, see: Trim on page 132. The range of displacements to be used is set in the same way as they are set in the KN and Limiting KG analyses. The VCG must also be specified since the Floodable length analysis is very sensitive to accurate trim calculations. This means that the vertical separation of CG and CB is accounted for in the trim balance. The permeability dialog is used to specify the permeabilities to be used for the Floodable Length analysis; the permeability is applied over the entire length of the vessel and is also applied to the free-surface when calculating the reduction of waterplane area and inertia.

Page 99


This permeability is unrelated to the permeability when defining compartments and is only used for floodable length calculations. Floodable Length Environment Options

Density Wave Form (if any) Damage: no damage case may be selected as this is automatically defined by the analysis. The Intact condition is automatically selected and the Damage toolbar is disabled Criteria from the Analysis menu, select which criteria should be evaluated

Criteria must be specified from the analysis menu. These are used to compute the Floodable Lengths.

Note that internally, Hydromax will treat the vessel sinking or the trim exceeding +/-89º as a criterion failure. Floodable Length results

The results of the analysis are given in tabulated format at the stations defined in the Maxsurf Design Grid as well as graphical format. The tabulated data is linearly interpolated from the graphical data. (The raw graph data can be accessed by double clicking the graph.) There are several graph plot options available in the Data | Data format dialog (when the floodable length graph is topmost). The vessel profile (centreline buttock) may also be displayed. All compartment standards up to the maximum specified will be plotted.

Page 100


Floodable lengths graph options: Fix the y-axis so that it is the same scale as the x-axis. Plot the different compartment standards up to a specified maximum value. Vessel profile (shown in light grey) Floodable Length Bulkheads locations are specified in a table in the Input window. The graph updates in real time as you adjust the bulkhead locations so once you have calculated the floodable lengths, you can quickly adjust the bulkhead locations so that the vessel meets the required compartment standard.

If the analysis is unable to find a condition where the vessel passes the selected criteria, the following dialog will be displayed. The vessel sinking or the criteria failing in the intact condition could cause this.

Floodable Length Concepts

The analysis is performed by defining a flooded compartment, with the centre of the compartment at a section under investigation. The length of this flooded compartment is increased section-by-section until one of the criteria is failed. The compartment is then moved progressively forward along the vessel. This process may be visualised by turning on the display of the Hydromax sections.

Page 101


Note: Speed versus Accuracy The analysis will be both considerably more accurate and slower with a larger number of sections in the Hydromax model; it is recommended that a minimum of 100 sections be used for most situations. The speed of the analysis can be increased quite considerably by increasing the allowable tolerances in the Edit | Add Surface Areas This command automatically adds the surface areas and centres of gravity of all hull surfaces into the current loading condition. This is useful for estimating the initial weight of hull plating. Activate / Deactivate GHS Export

This command activates the GHS Import command in the File menu if a Hydrolink License is available. It can also be used to release the Hydrolink license – a restart of Hydromax will be required for this to take effect. Preferences dialog. Longitudinal Strength

Longitudinal Strength lets you determine the bending moments and shear forces created in the hull due to the loads applied in the Loadcase window. The analysis can be carried out in flat water or in a specified waveform. Choosing Longitudinal Strength

Select Longitudinal Strength from the Analysis Type option in the Analysis menu or toolbar. Longitudinal Strength Settings

The initial conditions required for Longitudinal Strength analysis are: Displacement and Centre of Gravity using the Loadcase window Distributed loads using the Loadcase window

When the Longitudinal Strength analysis mode is selected, two extra columns appear in the Loadcase window. These are used to specify the longitudinal extents of the load. A trapezium shaped distributed load is derived from the centre and fore and aft extents of the load. See the Loadcase Longitudinally Distributed Loads section on page 42 for more details.

Page 102


Longitudinal Strength Environment Options

Density Wave Form (if any) Damage (or Intact) from the Analysis toolbar Grounding (if any) Criteria, allowable shears and moments from Input window

Note that Hydromax will always use the fluid simulation method when performing a longitudinal strength analysis. For more information on how Hydromax can take fluids in tanks into account see Fluids Analysis Methods on page 137. Longitudinal Strength Results

The output from the longitudinal strength calculations is a graph of mass, buoyancy, damage and non-buoyant volumes and grounding loads. From these, the net load, shear force and bending moment along the length of the hull are computed. If defined, allowable shear forces and bending moments are overlayed on the graph. Downward acting masses, such as normal masses in the loadcase or lost buoyancy due to damage, are given positive values. Upward acting forces such as buoyancy and grounding reactions are given negative values.

Name of Curve Mass Buoyancy

Description Vessel mass / unit length Buoyancy distribution / unit length = immersed cross sectional area * density. Damaged tanks and compartments reduce the

Page 103


Grounding Damage/NBV Net Load Shear

buoyancy. Grounding reaction Loas buoyancy due to damaged tanks and compartments and Non-Byoyant Volumes (NBV) Mass + Buoyancy + Grounding + Damage (and NBV) x

Shear Force =

NetLoad( x)dx AftSt

Moment

x

Bending Moment =

ShearForce( x)dx AftSt

Allowable shear and moment

Allowable shear and bending moments as specified in the input Modulus table.

This data is also displayed in the “Long. Strength” tab in the Results window. You can display this table by choosing Longitudinal Strength from the Results sub-menu under the Window menu; alternatively double-clicking in the graph will give you all the data as plotted. Note Make sure you have defined sections in your model in Maxsurf. Without this, the longitudinal strength table will be empty.

Note: For the purposes of strength calculations, any point loads in the loadcase will be applied as a load evenly distributed 100mm either side of the position of the load. Tanks are taken into account as distributed loads as well based on their mass distribution that is calculated from the tank sections. Tank Calibrations

Tank Calibration allows you to determine the properties of the tanks you have defined in the Compartment window, at a range of capacities. Choosing Tank Calibrations

Select Tank Calibrations from the Analysis Type option in the Analysis menu or toolbar.

Page 104


Tank Calibration Input

Tank definitions and boundaries Permeability Fluid type

All required Tank Calibration Analysis input can be specified in the Compartment Definition table. Also see: Relative Density of Tank Fluids on page 56 Tank Calibration Settings

Trim, fixed trim Tank Calibration Environment Options

Density Tank Calibration Results

In the Window | Graphs menu each tank can be selected for display in the Graph window. For more information see Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference.

Page 105


Sounding pipes and tank calibration results

If the vessel is trimmed, there are ranges of tank volumes that will show the same sounding/ullage. (The same effect can occur if the sounding pipe does not reach the lowest or highest point in the tank – remember that this can change as the vessel trims, which is effectively what is happening in the figures below). These points occur when the tank is near empty or near full, see below (increasing the trim, will exacerbate this phenomenon):

Figure a Zero trim

Figure b Trim by bow, near-empty tank

Figure c Trim by bow, near-full tank

Figure a shows a sounding pipe that extends the whole height of the tank, with the vessel at zero trim. Here all tank filling levels will have a valid sounding. Figure b shows the vessel with (bow down) trim and a small amount of fluid in the tank. Here there will be a range of tank filling levels which all show zero sounding. Figure c shows the vessel with the same trim, but with the tank nearly full. Here there will be a range of tank filling levels that all show maximum sounding.

Page 106


These effects will be noted in the tank calibration results if they are extreme enough since Hydromax always adds calibrations at 1%, 97.9%, 98% and 100% full; if the 1% level does not intersect the sounding pipe, the sounding will be given as zero. Similarly if the 97.9%, 98% and 100% full levels do not intersect the sounding pipe, the maximum sounding will be displayed, see below. In the results out lined in red, there are four results which all have a sounding of 1.0m but different capacities – the fluid levels are all above the top of the sounding pipe. In the blue results, the last two results are below the bottom of the sounding pipe, giving soundings of 0.0m but different capacities (the last but one calibration point is the fluid remaining in the tank when the sounding is 0.0m).

Tank calibrations for severely trimmed vessels; sounding pipe does not cover full range of tank capacities. The profile view of the tank in the trimmed vessel is shown on the right; the sounding pipe is in the middle of the tank and extends from the bottom to the top of the tank.

In a similar way, if the sounding pipe extends above or below the maximum and minimum fluid levels, you will get readings which have the same capacity but different soundings. User specified sounding intervals

With the addition of user specified tank calibration intervals, it is possible to specify the calibration intervals that you require. These will start at a sounding of zero (rather than an ullage of zero). Note that in addition to the specified soundings, levels of 1%, 97.9%, 98% and 100% full will also be added if they have not already been included in the specified soundings. The 97.9% and 98% levels are given because it is at 98% that the free surface moment is made zero. Probabilistic Damage IMO Probabilistic damage

Hydromax support for Probabilistic damage according to both IMO MSC.216(82) and IMO MSC.19(58) . MSC.216(82) can be applied to both dry cargo and passenger ships whilst MSC.19(58) is applicable to dry cargo vessels only.

Page 107

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Probabilistic damage – Principles

Essentially the probabilistic damage analysis performs a number of large angle stability analyses and uses the IMO criterion to determine an s-factor that depends on certain parameters of the GZ curve. The GZ curves are calculated for a large number of different damage conditions and several load cases. For each condition, a p-factor can be calculated. The vessel‟s attained subdivision index is the sum of the products of the pfactors with their corresponding s-factors. The attained subdivision index can then be compared with a required subdivision index to see if the vessel achieves a sufficiently high degree of safety. Flow through – Typical Use-case

The following section shows how the probabilistic damage analysis might typically be used. Maxsurf model is loaded as normal User defines (first selecting File | New to open the Probabilistic damage data table) other ship data required for the probabilistic damage analysis in the Damage window | Global table. User defines the damage zones they wish to consider in the Damage window | Zones table Once 2 and 3 have been completed, the p-factors Damage window | p Factors table are automatically calculated and displayed as the zone data is modified. It is useful to have this interaction because if the p Factor is too large for a particular zone, the user may decide to refine the zone arrangement. User defines the bulkheads and deck values for single and groups of adjacent zones. When the Zones have been defined the user can then define which tanks are damaged in each zone in the Damage window | Zone damage table. A first pass at this can be automatically generated using the Case | Extent of damage command. The user can then perform the probabilistic damage analysis. Hydromax runs a large angle stability analysis for each combination of loadcase and damage and collates the results to calculate the attained index. This is then compared with the required index.

During the analysis each GZ curve and details on the evaluation of the s-factor may be saved in a log file. The same log file is used for each analysis so it is important to either change the name or copy the file at the end of the analysis if the results are to be kept. The log file parameters may be specified in the Edit | Preferences dialog:

Page 108


Probabilistic damage result logging options (Edit | Preferences) Finding the probabilistic damage input sheets.

The probabilistic damage input sheets are in the damage window after the normal damage condition sheet.

Page 109


A Probabilistic Damage toolbar button is available in the Windows toolbar which will take the user back to the last used probabilistic damage input table:

Probabilistic damage – Saving input parameters

The probabilistic damage data is saved in the .hmd file. However this is new to version 14.1 and if the file were read into an earlier version of Hydromax and saved, these data would be lost. For this reason it is also possible to save the probabilistic damage data as a separate file (in a similar way to the other Hydromax input data). To load or save the probabilistic damage data as a separate file, ensure that one of the probabilistic damage data sheets in the Damage window is on top.

Bring one of the probabilistic damage tables to the front to enable File menu items Probabilistic damage – Inputs

In this section we shall look at the input parameters required for the probabilistic damage analysis. Settings for Probabilistic damage GZ curve calculation

Since the analysis essentially consists of a large number of GZ curve calculations, most of the settings that are applicable to the Large Angle Stability analysis are also applicable to the Probabilistic Damage Analysis. Chose the Probabilistic Damage analysis mode from the pull-down or Analysis menu:

Page 110


Selecting Probabilistic Damage anlysis mode

Once you have selected the probabilistic damage analysis mode, you can define the heel angle range and trim settings to be used as well as any environmental parameters such as waveform (as well as the fluid analysis method to be used). During probabilistic damage analysis, it is possible to check the vessel heeling to both port and starboard. This is useful if the tanks contain ballast or cargo and it is uncertain in which direction the vessel will list when damaged (or indeed the vessel may list to different directions depending on the loadcase and damage). Hydromax will calculate the GZ curve in both directions and, if the criteria can be evaluated in both directions, the lowest s-factor will be taken. If the criteria can only be evaluated in one direction, then this value for the s-factor will be taken. It is recommended to evaluate at least one negative heel angle and the direction of heel should correspond to the side of the vessel that is being damaged (see below):

Page 111


Heel angle specification (as per Large Angle Stability)

Use either fixed trim or free to trim to loadcase. s-factor calculation

The s-factors are calculated by stability criteria. The Probailistic damage analysis has its own set of criteria (though the same parent criteria are also available in the large angle stability analysis criteria). When the analysis mode has been set to Proababilistic Damage, you will see the criteria that are used for this analysis. The number of parent criteria is reduced to only those which can calculate the s-factor. Also some “Default” criteria are supplied, you can add or modify these should you so desire. When running the analysis, Hydromax will look at the probabilistic criteria that have been selected and warn you if there are any problems.

Page 112


Probabilistic Damage Criteria Manager with Parent and Default criteria

The following rules should be observed when defining the probabilistic damage criteria: As with the normal criteria manager, changes made to the parent (bold) criteria are not saved. If you need to modify any of the criteria you should make your own copies of the parent criteria A set of Default criteria are provided – these can be modified and changes will be saved. Only one criterion should be selected and it should correspond to the IMO Resolution being used. (Strictly, you may have up to one of each MSC.216(82) or MSC.19(58) criteria selected and Hydromax will automatically use the appropriate one – according to the selected Resolution in the Global sheet – but for clarity, it is probably best practive to just have a single criterion selected.) The criteria should always be selected for Damage analysis. Hydromax will automatically update some of the criteria parameters according to corresponding parameters in the probabilistic damage setup. However it is still good practice to review criteria parameters before starting the analysis. This is particularly true for the MSC.216(82) Resolution where the vessel type and heeling moments must be defined correctly. The criteria window can be closed with either of the close buttons.

For further information on how the s-factors are calculated and the different parameters, please refer to the Criteria Help section for the appropriate criteria (and heeling arms). Main parameters and calculation of required subdivision index

The other parameters required for the probabilistic damage analysis are defined in the last four tables in the Damage window:

Page 113


Additional tables in the Damage window define the remaining Probabilistic damage input data

Depending on the selected IMO Resolution, different rows and columns will be displayed in the tables; both MSC.216(82) and MSC.19(58) are provided, A.265 VIII is not included. Tool tips have been added to provide a more detailed explanation of the input parameters and also the options available.

Tool tips for Global data sheet Global table

This table is used to define the main parameters for the probabilistic damage anlysis as well as provide some intermediate calculations. Input data are shown in black whilst results are shown in grey. Depending on the Resolution and vessel type, some rows may be hidden.

Page 114


Global table – MSC.216(82) Dry Cargo vessel and Passenger vessel

Page 115


Global table – MSC.19(58) Dry Cargo

Row Resolution -MSC.216(82) or MSC.19(58) Deepest subdivision draft (summer loadline) Loadcase Partial subdivision draft Loadcase Light service draft Loadcase Type -- Cargo or Passenger Lifeboat capacity N_1 Permitted max. num. of persons in excess of N_1: N_2 max. moulded breadth at or below deepest subdivision draft: B max. number of adjacent zones to consider min. p-Factor of damage to consider Page 116

Description IMO Resolution to be used.

Name of loadcase that defines the vessel at the deepest subdivision draft. Name of loadcase that defines the vessel at the partial subdivision draft. Name of loadcase that defines the vessel at the light subdivision draft. not required for MSC.19(58). Vessle type. not required for MSC.19(58). Number of persons for whom lifeboats are provided. required for MSC.216(82), pax. Vessel only. Number of persons inclusing officers and crew that the vessel is permitted to carry in excess of N_1. required for MSC.216(82), pax. Vessel only. Parameter not currently used.

Specifies the upper limit of the number of adjacent zones that should be damaged. If you wish to limit the analysis by p-factor only, then specify the number of zones here (see min p-factor below). Specifies the minimum p-factor for which an analysis should be performed. The maximum a condition can contribute to the


max. trim angle to consider Limit vertical extent of damage? max. vertical extent of damage Damaged side -Starboard or Port

Zone 1 located at bow or stern?

attained index is the p-factor. If the the p-factor is very small the contribution to the attained index will be negligible and there is little point in carrying out the analysis. Conditions whose pfactor is below this minimum will not be evaluated; this can speed up the analysis. If you wish the analysis to be purely limited by the number of adjacent zones (see above) then specify a small negative value. This will ensure that conditions with zero p-factor will still be evaluated. If the vessel trim exceeds this value, then the s-factor will be taken as zero (irrespective of the GZ curve). This can speed up the analysis. If desired the vertical extent of damage (when automatically generating the zone damage) can be limited. If desired the vertical extent of damage (when automatically generating the zone damage) can be limited. Specifies which side of the vessel will be damaged (when automatically generating the zone damage). The extent of damage is assumed to go all the way to the centreline but you may specify which side of the vessel is damaged. The heel direction in the Heel setup should correspond to the side of the vessel being damaged. It is normal to begin the Zone numbering at the stern, but the option to start from the bow is also allowd in Hydromax

Longitudinal Zone definition

The next table (Zones) allows for the definition of the longitudinal damage zones. Fore and aft extents of the zone boundaries are input by the user and the length and centre of the zone is automatically calculated; the boundaries of adjacent zones are automatically updated if required, as are the zone names. The subdivision length is taken as the limits of the length defined by the zones. As for other similar tables, use Edit | Add or Delete (or Ctrl+A or Del key, with a number of complete rows selected) to add or delete zones.

Damage zones defined by fwd and aft boundaries

Zones may be shown in the drawing views (this display option is only available in Probabilistic Damage analysis mode):

Page 117


Probabilistic damage zones (stbd. side damage) shown in pink. P-Factors

From the damage zone calculations, the probability of damaging a longitudinal zone or group of adjacent zones is calculated as well as the cumulative probability. The columns displayed depends on the choice of Resolution: MSC.216(82) or MSC.19(58) made in the Global table. All combinations of adjacent zones are calculated at this point. A subtotal for the pfactor for a given number of adjacent zones is given as well as a cumulative to total for all the p-factors. This will help the user to determine the maximum number of adjacent zones that should be analysed. In practice, it probably makes more sense to limit the analysis by specifying a desired minimum p-factor rather than a number of adjacent zones. This can easily be done by specifying the maximum number of adjacent zones as the number of zones defined. The last column shows whether a particular condition will be tested (if the p-factor is sufficiently large and the maximum number of adjacent zones is not exceeded).

Page 118


p-factor calculations for individual and groups of zones Sub zones due to transverse and vertical subdivision

As well as the main longitudinal subdivision, it is alos possible to define sub-zones due to longitudinal bulkheads (transverse subdivision) and decks (vertical subdivision). Transverse sub-zone definition and R-Factors

Transverse sub-zone definition allows the user to limit the damage penetration to a certain distance into the vessel towards the centerline, measured from the side-shell. I have followed IMO notation by specifying the penetration depth from the side-shell (rather than specifying the offset from the centerline). A column is provided for the user to specify the side-shell offset (from the centerline) and this is used only to draw the transverse extents of the damage zone, the inner limit being at a distance side-shell offset minus b from the centreline. The side-shell offset value defaults to the maximum halfbeam of the vessel. The r-factors are then calculated for each of the b-values that have been defined. Note that there is one extra r-factor than the number of bulkheads – this represents the probability of damaging to the centerline. The sum of all r-factors should be unity (a check is provided). The b-values are defined not only for each individual zone, but also for groups of adjacent zones. This is because where the side-shell or bulkhead is not parallel to the centerline, there is a special way of calculating the b-value and this needs to be done for each set of adjacent zones. If no b-values are specified, the zone will be damaged up to (but not across) the centreline.

Page 119


Longitudinal bulkhead definition and corresponding r-factors

Page 120


Visualisation of zones and sub-zones: sub-zones shown dashed; selected zone shown in bold.

The currently selected zone or sub-zone is shown in bold as well as any damage for that zone. This can also be seen in rendered view to quite effectively visualize the damage.

Clicking in a zone or sub-zone in the table highlights the zone graphically

Page 121


Vertical sub-zone definition and V-Factors

Similarly decks may be defined to create vertical subdivision of the zones. The corresponding v-factors are calculated, but these also depend on the draft of the vessel. Thus we introduce the concept of the currently selected Loadcase for the displayed vfactors. The loadcase for v-factor calculations is selected by clicking on the desired loadcase in the Global table. Note that during the full probabilistic damage analysis, the v-factors will be automatically recalculated for the loadcase under consideration.

Loadcase for v-factor calculations is selected by clicking on the desired loadcase in the Global table.

Page 122


Deck definition and corresponding v-factors

Page 123


Zone damage

The zone damage sheet specifies which tanks are damaged for a given zone. From this Hydromax can work out what should be damaged for any combination of adjacent damaged zones.

Definition of whats damaged in each zone

Once the zones are defined the user can select the Case | Extent of damage command and this will automatically generate the zone damage according to which tanks lie within the zone boundaries. Once the automatic damage is defined, this can be modified by the user should this prove to be necessary (or it can be defined from scratch by the user). The “Zone damage” tab of the Damage window must be on top to enable this command.

Automatic definition of damage for each zone

Additionally the user may automatically generate damage cases for the Zone damage that has been defined damage configurations within the maximum number of adjacent zones range and above the minimum p-factor will be added. This stage is not required for the probabilistic analysis, but has been added for convenience should the user wish to manually run large angle stability analyses for the same damage cases. The Damage window must be on top for this command to work. Damage cases will be added up to the maximum number of adjacent zones specified in the Global tab, if the pfactor exceeds the minimum values specified (again in the Global tab).

Page 124


Automatic creation of damage cases using the damage defined for each zone Visualization of zone damage

When in Probabilistic damage analysis mode the damaged tanks and compartments displayed are not those of the current damage case, but those of the currently selected zone. The zone is selected by clicking in the corresponding column of the Zone Damage table.

Page 125


Zone damage visualisation Probabilistic damage – Analysis

Once the analysis parameter data has been defined, it is worth checking that the heel direction (Analysis | Heel) is correct and also check that the s-factor calculation parameters are corerect (Analysis | Criteria) Pre-run checks

When trying to run the probabilistic damage analysis, Hydromax will make several checks to see if the analysis parameters have been correctly set up. These are not exhaustive tests but should pick up critical errors. The following checks are made: That loadcases that have been specified exist That the vessel type is correct in the criteria (if MSC.216(82) is being used) That the correct s-factor criterion has been selected. Note that only one criterion may be selected. If Hydromax finds no criteria selected but a suitable one is available (but unselected) then it will prompt the user to use this one:

Page 126


Analysis

Large angle stability analyses are computed for each combination of loadcase and zone damage up to either the specified maximum number of adjacent zones or the minimum specified p-factor. Basic data pertinent to calculation of the s-factor is also presented as well as a total Attained subdivision index at the bottom of the table. The required index is also shown as well as pass/fail status. Should the vessel sink, excessive trim occur or the large angle stability analysis fail to converge, this is reported and the s-factor given as zero.

Probabilistic analysis results Probabilistic damage – Future developments

The probabilistic damage analysis is still under development and new features will be added in subsequent versions of Hydromax. Starting and Stopping Analyses

To start the analysis, choose Start Analysis from the Analysis menu or toolbar. Hydromax will step through the parameter ranges specified, floating the hull to equilibrium conditions where required. Hydromax will redraw the contents of the windows to display the current hull position for each iteration.

Page 127


Calculations may be interrupted at any time by selecting Stop Analysis from the Analysis menu or toolbar. If you have stopped the analysis, you can resume calculation by selecting Resume Analysis from the Analysis Menu or toolbar. There may be a slight time delay on all of these operations while the current cycle is finished. You can also switch application by clicking in the window of any background program. Hydromax will continue to calculate in the background although its speed will be reduced. The drawing of the vessel at each step of the analysis can be quite time consuming. If you are not interested in seeing the progress of the analysis, switch to a table window and maximise it to speed up the analysis. Should the analysis take longer than about 45 seconds, Hydromax will flash and beep to indicate that the analysis has been completed. The start, pause and resume functions are also available in the Analysis toolbar:

Batch Analysis Batch Analysis Concepts

Hydromax has basic batch processing capability. With a single command, Hydromax will run Large Angle Stability and Equilibrium analyses for all combinations of load and damage cases. Further, Limiting KG and KN calculations can be made for each damage condition. There are other options which allow the analysis to be performed heeling to both port and starboard. For the Limiting KG analysis you may also check the Limiting KG for each criterion individually. You may also choose to perform a Large Angle Stability and Equilibrium analysis at the final VCG. The aim of the batch processing function is to: Provide the user with a simple and consistent way of carrying out Large Angle Stability and Equilibrium analyses on a large number of load and damage cases. Facilitate time consuming Limiting KG analyses, especially where results for all individual criteria are required. Enable Limiting KG and KN analyses to be performed automatically for all damage cases. Facilitate testing with heel to port and starboard for vessels with asymmetric loading and/or damage conditions (or hulls). Facilitate export of the data from Hydromax and import into MS Excel for post processing and report generation. Provide all relevant results and the data required to be able to reproduce the runs, i.e.: analysis parameters, file name etc.

Before you can perform a Batch Analysis it is recommended that you run a number of Analyses manually to check whether the Model has been defined correctly and all Analysis Settings and Environment conditions have been set correctly. Batch Analysis – Procedures

Once the loadcases, damage cases, key points, criteria and analysis parameters for the required analyses have been set up, the Batch Analysis is started Page 128


Analysis | Start Batch Analysis

Batch analysis runs all combination of loadcases and damage cases.

Tip: Under most operating systems, minimising Hydromax can reduce the time required to perform the calculations. This is because time consuming redrawing of the design windows, graphs and tables is avoided. Batch Analysis Settings

Analysis parameters such as trim, heel angles etc. are set in the normal way for each analysis type included in the Batch analysis. For example, if you want the Large Angle Stability to use a fixed trim of 0.5 m: first select the Large Angle Stability analysis type from the analysis menu set the trim to Fixed trim and 0.5 m then select Analysis | Batch Analysis Batch Analysis Environment Options (Criteria)

Any Analysis Environment Options specified prior to a Batch Analysis will be used during the Batch Analysis. Any criteria that have been set are evaluated at the end of each analysis and the results of these are also output to the text file.

Page 129


Important: For important information on varying displacement while evaluating criteria, see Important note: heeling arm criteria dependent on displacement on page 226. Batch Analysis Results

Before analysis starts, you will be prompted to enter the name and location of the file where Hydromax will write the results of the batch analysis. Once the analysis is complete, this tab delimited text file may be imported directly into MS Excel for further processing. Because the analyses are simply carried out one after the other, it is not possible to go back to the results for a specific analysis from within Hydromax; only the results of the final analysis will be stored in Hydromax. At the bottom of the dialog is a check box which allows users to select whether the results of a batch analysis should go to the Report window in Hydromax as well as the batch analysis text file. When the option for Sending the results to Word is selected in the Edit | Preferences dialog, the batch analysis will automatically create a Word document. Warning: Sending the results to the Report can slow down analysis considerably and also consume considerable system resources. For large batch analysis, it is advisable not to include the results in the report. The report is stored in memory and if you have insufficient memory, it is possible that your computer will become very slow to respond and under some circumstances with certain operating systems even cause Hydromax to crash. Also see: Reporting on page 145.

Analysis Settings In the previous sections opening and preparing a model in Hydromax was discussed together with descriptions of the different Analysis types. This section will describe the following analysis settings: Heel Trim Draft Displacement Specified Conditions Permeability

Hydromax will allow specification of only those analysis settings that apply to the currently selected analysis type.

Page 130


In hydrostatic analysis, there are three degrees of freedom: Trim, Heel and Draft. Hydromax matches the trim, heel and draft with the vessel‟s mass and centre of gravity or visa versa. This way the volume of the displaced hull matches the required mass and the centres of gravity and buoyancy lie one above the other in a vertical line. For example: it can match a specified heel, trim and draft by varying the displacement and centre of gravity; or it can match a specified displacement and centre of gravity by varying the heel, trim and draft. Combinations of both are also possible. The following table is a very simplified representation of the degrees of freedom and their weight counterpart:

1 2 3

Degree of Freedom Draft Trim Heel

Weight Displacement Longitudinal Centre of Gravity (LCG) Transverse Centre of Gravity (TCG)

In fact it is a rather more complicated situation than that suggested by the table above, because vertical centre of gravity is also important and also because most of the variables are coupled. The various analysis types and settings can be thought of as setting one variable in each pair to a fixed value and deriving the others from the analysis. For example: the Upright Hydrostatics analysis consists of fixing heel and trim and stepping through a series of fixed drafts. In this case the LCB and TCB (and therefore the required LCG and TCG) are calculated from the underwater hullshape at each draft. For an equilibrium analysis all degrees of freedom are derived from the centre of gravity and Displacement. In the Specified Condition Analysis any combination of the variable pairs may be specified. Heel

The Heel dialog from the analysis menu is used to specify the range of heel angles to be used for Large Angle Stability, KN and Limiting KG analyses. Heel angles between 180 and +180 may be specified. The heel steps must be positive. If only one set of steps is required, simply put 0 in the other steps. If there is any asymmetry in the vessel due to either: hull shape, key points, loading, damage, etc., and there is any doubt as to which will be the worst heel direction, then the analysis should be carried out for both heel to starboard and heel to port to find the most pessimistic condition. If all the heel angle intervals are 10 deg or less, Hydromax will fit a cubic spline to the GZ curve and use this to interpolate for values between the tested heel angles. If any step is greater than 10 deg, Hydromax will not do any curve fitting and linear interpolation will be used.

Page 131


Note: For the angle of equilibrium to be found (when analysing criteria), it is essential that the GZ curve crosses the GZ=0 axis with positive slope. It is possible that the GZ at zero heel may be very slightly positive (due to asymmetry or rounding error) for this reason, it is advisable to test at least one negative heel angle, at say -5 degrees, to ensure that the equilibrium angle is identified. It is good practise to start the heel range at an angle of approximately -30°. This is to allow roll back angle criteria to be evaluated correctly.

Note: The heel angles to be used are specified independently for each analysis mode. This can be a source of apparent differences in the results from the different analyses. Trim

For most analyses you may specify whether the vessel is free-to-trim or has fixed trim. Select Trim in the Analysis menu to bring up the Trim dialog. Trim may be specified for Upright Hydrostatics, Large Angle Stability, KN Analysis Limiting KG, Floodable Length and Tank Calibrations. (For the Specified Condition analysis, the trim may be specified in the Specified Conditions dialog.) Equilibrium and Longitudinal Strength analyses always use a free trimming (and free heeling) analysis so that there is no trimming (or heeling) moment applied to the vessel at the final equilibrium. Essentially there are three options for trim: 1. Fixed trim – the analysis is carried out at a fixed, specified initial trim. This applies to all analyses that carry out a large angle stability-type analysis (Large Angle Stability, Limiting KG, KN, Probabilistic Damage) as well as Upright Hydrostatics and Tank Calibrations 2. Free to trim to loadcase – the analysis trims the vessel to the CG specified in the loadcase. This option is available for all analyses that have a loadcase: Large Angle Stability, Equilibrium, Longitudinal Strength, Probabilistic Damage.

Page 132


3. Free to trim to specified CG – this is again free-to-trim but the CG is specified in the dialog. This is for when a range of displacements is used for the analysis: Limiting KG, KN, Floodable Length. In this case, all three components of the CG need to be know. This it is possible to specify the LCG either directly or so that the upright, intact vessel floats at a specified trim. The TCG and VCG are specified directly. In the case of the Limiting KG analysis, the VCG is being found by the analysis, so cannot be specified. For the Floodable Length analysis, heel is not considered thus TCG cannot be specified.

Specification of different trim options is dependent on the type of analysis currently selected.

Fixed trim (KN and Limiting KG analyses only). The analysis is carried out with the specified fixed trim; the vessel is not free-totrim as it heels. Although considerably faster, this analysis will tend to overestimate ship stability properties such as GZ. Free-to-trim using a specified initial trim value Using this method, for each displacement, the LCB of the intact vessel at the specified trim and zero heel is computed. The LCG is calculated using this value and the VCG. Calculations at each heel angle of the large angle stability analysis are then done free-to-trim using the derived LCG and VCG. Thus, for each displacement, the upright, intact vessel trim will be the same, but the LCG will be different. Free-to-trim to a specified LCG value With this method, a specified constant LCG is maintained for each displacement. This LCG is then used to compute the free-to-trim vessel orientation at each heel angle as the large angle stability analysis is performed. Thus, for each displacement, the LCG will be the same, but the upright vessel trim will be different.

Page 133


VCG for trim balance The VCG, measured from the vertical zero datum (not necessarily KG), may be specified. For KN analysis, the VCG will only have an effect if the analysis is free-to-trim. It will be used to determine the LCG if an initial trim value is specified. It will also be used to improve the accuracy of the KN results. For Floodable Length calculations, which are always calculated free-to-trim, the VCG will be used to calculate the LCG if an initial trim value is specified. Also, because the analysis is very sensitive to trim, the VCG is needed to provide an accurate balance of the trimming moment. (As the trim angle increases the longitudinal movement of the centre of gravity due to its vertical position becomes more important.) In the case of the Limiting KG analysis, the actual VCG is used and the VCG input field will state “not applicable”. TCG value The TCG option allows you to specify an off-centreline centre of gravity for Limiting KG and KN calculations. This is especially useful when evaluating the Limiting KG of a damaged vessel that had cargo or ballast in tanks which are subsequently damaged. The TCG can be either specified directly or calculated from the tank loadings defined in the current loadcase. Current Loadcase specifies initial loading of damaged tanks (los mass during analysis)

Finally, for the Limiting KG analysis, there is an option to automatically adjust the displacement and LCG of the vessel so that liquid cargo of damaged tanks is removed from the model. This is for consistency with the lost buoyancy analysis method: the buoyancy contribution of damaged tanks is removed from the model, so to be consistent, any liquid cargo should also be removed from the model. Draft

The draft dialog is used to specify the range of drafts to be used for the Upright hydrostatics analysis.

The VCG specified in the draft dialog is used for the calculation of upright stability characteristics such as GMt only, and is specified in terms of KG – i.e. from the baseline, which is not necessarily the vertical zero datum. Displacement

The displacement dialog is used to specify the range of displacements to be used for the KN, Limiting KG and Floodable Length calculations. Page 134


Specified Conditions

The specified conditions analysis setting is only available for the specified condition analysis. See Specified Conditions on page 87. Permeability

The Permeabilities are set in a table in the Permeability dialog. Use the Add and Delete buttons to add or delete rows from the table. The permeabilities may be sorted by double clicking on the permeability column heading. The last set of permeabilities used will be recalled from the registry when Hydromax is started.

The Permeability dialog is used to specify the permeabilities to be used for the Floodable Length analysis; the permeability is applied over the entire length of the vessel. This permeability is unrelated to compartment, tank or non-buoyant volume permeability and is only used for floodable length calculations. Individual Permeability of Tanks and Compartments

The individual permeability of each compartment (or tank) is specified in the Compartment definition table. The compartment, tank and non-buoyant volume permeabilities are used when calculating the effects of damage, and/or calculating the weights of fluids in tanks in the loadcase. Also see: Modelling Compartments on page 48 Tolerances

In the Edit | Add Surface Areas

Page 135


This command automatically adds the surface areas and centres of gravity of all hull surfaces into the current loading condition. This is useful for estimating the initial weight of hull plating. Activate / Deactivate GHS Export

This command activates the GHS Import command in the File menu if a Hydrolink License is available. It can also be used to release the Hydrolink license – a restart of Hydromax will be required for this to take effect. Preferences dialog of Hydromax, calculation tolerances can be set. This defines the tolerances that Hydromax uses to determine when to finish iteration during Large Angle Stability Equilibrium analysis Specified conditions KN calculations Floodable Length Longitudinal Strength

Ideal tolerances can range between 0.00001% and 0.1% (1 gram in 10 tonnes of displacement). Acceptable tolerances can range from 0.001% to 1.0%. Acceptable tolerances should always be greater than Ideal tolerances. Convergence Error

Hydromax will attempt to solve most analysis to within the ideal tolerance. If this is not achieved within a certain number of iterations, but the acceptable error has been achieved, Hydromax will continue. If convergence to within the acceptable error has not been achieved, Hydromax will display a warning.

One of the most common causes of non-convergence is if the specified displacement exceeds the volume of the completely submerged vessel and it sinks. Also convergence may be poor if the trim angle approaches 90 . If Hydromax thinks that it is likely that the model has sunk (waterplane area is zero at the current condition) the following dialog will be displayed. The specified displacement and the actual displacement at the current iteration are provided for information. Note This warning is not displayed during batch analysis, instead the warning is written in the batch file.

Page 136


The warning is also not shown when accessing Hydromax from a VBA macro using the Automation interface If there is a convergence problem, which appears not to be due to sinking, then the following dialog will be displayed.

This problem can sometimes occur if the specified displacement is extremely small and the vessel has a large flat bottom, producing a highly non-linear waterplane area vs. draft plot. Other causes of non-convergence can be non-linear moment to trim vs. trim angle curve or moment to heel vs. heel angle curve. Note: There are occasions when convergence will not necessarily occur within the maximum allowable number of iterations. If Hydromax fails to converge it will give you a warning, but will allow you the option of continuing the search. If you choose to continue, Hydromax will search for the equilibrium position indefinitely. If the search is unsuccessful after a reasonable period of time, you can interrupt Hydromax by pausing the analysis. The analysis will also fail to converge if the trim becomes excessive. All analyses other than Floodable Length will fail if the trim exceeds +/-45º; in the case of the Floodable Length analysis, this limit is increased to +/-89º.

Analysis Environment Options The analysis can be performed in different environments; this section describes the analysis environment options available in Hydromax in more detail:

Page 137


Fluids Analysis Methods Density Waveform Grounding Stability Criteria Damage

Fluids Analysis Methods

Hydromax allows you to specify two different ways of simulating any fluids contained in tanks or compartments. Selecting Fluids in the Analysis menu opens the Fluids Analysis dialog. It is possible to specify the range of filling levels for which free surface moments should be applied in the loadcase. This functionality is accessed through the Analysis | Fluids dialog:

Fluid Analysis dialog

If the corrected the VCG method is used, the FSM is applied if the filling level is within the exclusive range specified; i.e. if the filling level is less than or equal to the lower limit or the filling level is greater than or equal to the upper limit, the free surface moment will be zero. The upper limit is clearly stated by IMO as 98%, but the code provides some flexibility in interpretation for the lower limit. You may set different limits for each of the different free surface moment types other than “User Specified”. (see IMO IS Code) 3.3.2 Free surface effects should be considered whenever the filling level in a tank is less than 98% of full condition. Free surface effects need not be considered where a tank is nominally full ,i.e. filling level is 98% or above.

3.3.10 The usual remainder of liquids in empty tanks need not be taken into account in calculating the corrections, provided that the total of such residual liquids does not constitute a significant free surface effect. In addition it is possible to ignore the free surface moment if the VCG correction for a single tank, due to the free surface moment is less than a specified amount. This requires that a nominal minimum displacement be specified. This is applicable to the “IMO” free surface moment type only. (see IMO IS Code)

Page 138


3.3.9 Small tanks which satisfy the following condition using the values of "k" corresponding to an angle of inclination of 30°, need not be included in the correction:

M fs /

m in

0.01m

where M fs is the free surface moment of the tank in question and

m in

is

the ship displacement at the minimum mean service draft of the ship without cargo, with 10% stores and minimum water ballast, if required. Note: Tank Calibration results In the tank calibration results the free-surface moment based on the transverse second moment of area of the tank waterplane is given for all filling levels. This is because the actual free surface moment to be used to determine the VCG in a loadcase depends on the method being used and also the heel angle in question (in the case of the IMO correction).

Note: Calculation of GM GM values always use the centre of gravity corrected for free surface moments even if the “simulate fluid” option has been chosen. Note that the upright free surface moments as shown in the loadcase are used, not those from the actual second moment of area of the inclined tank waterplane.

Note Most documented stability criteria assume that the corrected VCG method has been used. Although the computational potential is available, authorities have not adopted this more accurate calculation of the shift in centre of gravity due to fluid movement. Fluid analysis method: Use corrected VCG

Tank capacities and free surface moments are calculated for the upright hull (zero trim and zero heel). The effective rise in VCG due to the tanks' free surface is calculated by summing the free surface moment of all the tanks and dividing by the total vessel displacement (the free surface moment to be applied is specified in the loadcase). This method should be used when compiling a stability booklet for a design, as it corresponds with the traditional approach used by naval architects and classification societies worldwide. It is reasonably accurate at low angles of heel and trim. In this case, the loading window will include a column for free surface moment and cells for corrected fluid VCG. These values are automatically calculated from the maximum free surface moments of the tanks, calculated in the upright condition. There are several FSM types available. For more information, see Working with Loadcases on page 35.

Page 139


Fluid analysis method: Simulate fluid movement

This method is a faithful simulation of the static movement of the centre of gravity of the fluid in each tank. Every tank is rotated to the heel and trim angle being analysed. Hydromax iterates to find the fluid level for the rotated tank at the specified capacity. The new centre of gravity is calculated for each tank and used in the analysis. The new LCG, VCG and TCG are calculated for the whole design and used in the calculation of GZ, KG, and GM. This approach is used when the stability of a vessel is being investigated and the closest possible simulation of the hull's behaviour is required. It is particularly useful at high angles of heel or trim, or with tanks whose heeled water plane area may be significantly different from the upright case (i.e. tall narrow tanks, or wide shallow tanks). The penalty of using this approach is that the calculation time is longer, however the results are significantly more accurate.

When fluid simulation method is selected, free surface moments and corrected fluid VCG are normally not displayed in the loadcase.

When selected, fluid simulation is used for analyses that use a loadcase, i.e. Large Angle Stability, Equilibrium Condition and Longitudinal Strength (the Longitudinal Strength analysis always uses fluid simulation). When fluid simulation is used in one of these analyses, the actual fluid level in the tank, filled to the volume specified in the loadcase, will be displayed in the View window. Otherwise the complete tank will be shown. Density of Fluids

Where necessary, the density of sea water (the fluid in which the vessel is floating) and fluids commonly carried on board can be adjusted using the Density dialog. Density using the current units, or non-dimensional relative density (specific gravity), may be specified. Alternatively, density may be specified using Barrels as the unit of volume. Conversions are performed automatically. Specific gravity is calculated relative to a fluid having a density of 1000.0 kg/m3.

Page 140


By assigning a code to the fluid you can easily apply the fluid type in the Compartment Definitions table. Tanks that have been specified as containing one of these fluids will be updated automatically when the density of the fluid is changed in the Density dialog. Tank calibrations results and loading conditions will also be updated. Note The vessel's hydrostatics are always calculated assuming the vessel is floating in the fluid labelled "Sea Water". This is the first fluid in the list printed in bold font. If the vessel is to float in a different fluid, it is necessary to change the density of this fluid. Note that only the custom fluids may have their names changed. Thus, if you wanted to carry out an analysis for a vessel in fresh water, you would change the density of "Sea Water" to 1000.0 kg/m3. Saving and Loading Densities

Densities listed in the Density table can be saved and loaded using the File menu. The densities file may be edited manually if desired. There is one row for each of the 18 fluid types. The four columns, each separated by a tab character. These are fluid name, fluid code, specific gravity, colour respectively (the colour is in hexadecimal for the red, green, blue components and are probably much more easily edited in the Density dialog. The name and code for the first entry, Sea Water, cannot be changed (any changes made will be ignored). All other entries may be edited (the same restrictions area applied as when editing through the Density dialog). Sea Water Water Ballast Fresh Water Diesel Fuel Oil Lube Oil ANS Crude Gasoline leaded

S B W D F L C G

1.0250 1.0250 1.0000 0.8400 0.9443 0.9200 0.8883 0.7499

6D00FF00FF00 6D006D00FF00 FF005F005F00 FF005B00FF00 6D00FF006D00 7F007F007F00 3F003F003F00 FF0000007F00

Page 141


Unlead. Gas. JFA MTBE Gasoil Slops Custom 1 Custom 2 Custom 3 Custom 4 Custom 5

U J M GO SL C1 C2 C3 C4 C5

0.7499 0.8203 0.7471 0.8524 0.9130 1.0000 1.0000 1.0000 1.0000 1.0000

FF007F007F00 7F007F00FF00 F600FA00C900 FF00FF007F00 FF006F00FF00 D6000300D600 D600D6000300 0300D600D600 D60003000300 DF00DF00DF00

If you make an error, you can always reset the densities to their default values in the Densities dialog. Also see: Windows Registry on page 15 Waveform

Hydromax is capable of analysing hydrostatics and stability in arbitrary waveforms as well as for a level water plane. To specify a waveform, select the Waveform command from the Analysis menu:

The water plane can be specified as flat, or as a sinusoidal or trochoidal waveform. If a waveform is specified, the wavelength, wave height and phase offset can be specified. The wavelength defaults to the waterline length of the hull at the DWL. If the wavelength is modified the wave height defaults to a value in metres of: Wave height [m] = 0.607 √ Wavelength [m] This is the metric equivalent of the US Naval standard wave height: Wave height [ft] = 1.1 √ Wavelength [ft] For short waves of wavelength less than 64m, the waveheight reduces linearly with wavelength given by the formula: Wave height = 0.075875 Wavelength

Page 142


Once a wavelength has been set, the wave height may be modified. The phase offset governs the position of the wave crest aft of the forward end of the DWL, as a proportion of the wavelength. The phase offset varies between 0 and 1, both of which correspond to a wave crest at the forward end of the DWL. For example, a phase offset of 0.5, with a wavelength equal to the waterline length, will give a single wave crest at amidships. Grounding

Grounding is an additional analysis environment option for the Equilibrium or Longitudinal Strength analysis. It is possible to specify grounding on one or two points of variable length. The Equilibrium analysis will determine whether the hull is grounded or free floating and will trim the hull accordingly. Damage can be specified concurrently with grounding. If the vessel touches one or both grounding points, this will be reflected in the results: The displacement column will show the total grounding reaction force in brackets; the sum of the buoyancy and the grounding reactions equals the loadcase displacement.

The effective centre of gravity will be modified by the grounding reactions – a mass is effectively being removed from the vessel; this will bring the effective centres of gravity and the centre of buoyancy in line vertically. The value of KG, GMt and GMl are all calculated to the effective centre of gravity. Remember that KG is measured in the upright vessel reference frame (normal to the baseline); whilst GMt and GMl are the actual vertical separation of the metacentres above the centre of gravity in the trimmed reference frame normal to the sea surface.

Page 143


Note: Grounding points are considered to span the transverse extents of the hull and therefore constrain the heel to zero. The length of the grounding points is only used when considering the load distribution for Longitudinal Strength analysis and not to determine the pivot point. The vessel is considered to pivot at the centre of the grounding point. When two grounding points are entered, the first point (edit boxes on the left) must refer to the forward grounding point; the second grounding point is the aft grounding point.

Note: Fixed zero heel during grounding analysis The equilibrium analysis will only consider the longitudinal balance of moments, i.e. the vessel will not be balanced in heel and the vessel will remain upright (zero heel) even if the transverse metacentric height is less than zero. Stability Criteria

Stability criteria may be seen as the “environment of authorities” that the ship will be deployed in. For more information see Chapter 4 Stability Criteria starting at page 153. Damage

You can specify whether the model is to be analysed in intact or damaged condition using the Analysis Toolbar. Also see: Damage Case Definition on page 68

Page 144


Analysis Output Hydromax will produce the following output data: Hydromax model visualisation Result data tables per analysis Graphs per analysis Report o

Report window

o

Streamed directly to a Word document

o

Report Templates

In this section: Reporting Copying Select View from Analysis Data Saving the Hydromax Design Exporting

Reporting

Hydromax has several options to do your reporting: Batch Analysis text file and/or streaming to Report window Automatically generate a report in the Report Window for each analysis run Automatically Streaming results to Word Manually copy and paste tables and graphs from the Results Window and Graph Window

The most efficient method depends on the number of loadcases and damage cases you have to analyse and the output you require. Form small number of loadcases and damage cases you can do a manual copy and paste of the results into a report. This then allows you to validate the results at the same time. For large numbers of cases, it is recommended to use batch analysis. Batch Analysis results saved as text files do not include graphs. Select the option to send the results to the report window if you require Graphs. Additionally, if the option to Stream the report to Word has been selected in the Edit | Add Surface Areas This command automatically adds the surface areas and centres of gravity of all hull surfaces into the current loading condition. This is useful for estimating the initial weight of hull plating. Activate / Deactivate GHS Export

This command activates the GHS Import command in the File menu if a Hydrolink License is available. It can also be used to release the Hydrolink license – a restart of Hydromax will be required for this to take effect. Preferences dialog a word document is automatically generated after a Batch Analysis. Streaming results to Word

It is possible to stream the Analysis results directly to Word. To do this:

Page 145


Edit | Preferences Select the option to Send the Report to Word

This will send the Report document to Word instead of to the Report window. After you have run an analysis a Word document is created and opened automatically. This also applies to Batch Analysis. Report Templates

Hydromax offers the ability to customise reports through a Report Template. This feature is only available when sending reports to Microsoft Word. With report templates, instead of just dumping the results of each analysis into a Word document, it is possible to use template keywords to specify where in the document the analysis results go and where each element of the output (such as graph, tables, etc) is placed. This gives you much greater control over how the analysis results are output than with the normal Send Report to Word option and allows you to customise your own report template document. To turn on Report Templating you need to select it in the Preferences dialog box. Simply tick the box „Use Word Templating‟. Please note that Send Report to Word must be enabled before you can enable this option. See the dialog box below as an example:

Page 146


The Word Template File specified should be in .dot or .dotx/dotm (for Word 2007) format and will be used when creating any future reports. You can use one of the sample templates provided, or you can build your own template. Two Report Templates have been included to get you started: StabilityBooklet.dot This is an example of a complete Stability Booklet template – this document is the default Word Template file for new users and is recommend for users wanting to quickly create a Stability Booklet. Users can start with StabilityBootlet.dot and then use it customise their own report template. HMReportTemplate.dot This document is a good starting point for creating your own customised template. It contains an introduction to how templates are created and configured. It also includes all of the basic analysis blocks and variables to get you started. Both of these templates contain macros and toolbar items to make life easier when you design your own template. These allow you to easily add and remove the analysis keyword blocks.

Note: To edit a report template in Microsoft Word you will need to start Microsoft Word and then open the template directly using the File menu. Simply double-clicking on a template document opens up a new document based on the template (which is not what you want).

The location of these report templates varies depending on which operating system you are using. On Windows XP/Server 2003 the default location for the report templates is: C:\Program Files\Maxsurf 14\Report Templates\ On Windows Vista, due to new security changes we‟ve had to move this to an alternative location that every user has write access to – so you can find it at: C:\Users\Public\Documents\Maxsurf\Maxsurf14\Report Templates\ Tips:

See: Copying Tables on page 147 for tips on how to include the table header in a copy paste to for example Excel Graph Formatting on page 180 for tips on how to format your graph prior to copying to another application. Data Format on page 196 for tips on how to specify what should be displayed and customise how to display tables (vertical or horizontal). Copying & Printing

A range of options for transferring data from Hydromax to other programs such as spreadsheets and word processors is provided through copy and paste functions. This data transfer works both ways: e.g. copying and pasting data to and from Excel spreadsheets allows you to use the full spreadsheet capabilities of Excel on your Hydromax model. Page 147


Copying Hull Views

Pictures of the hull in the View windows may be copied to the Clipboard using the Copy command from the Edit menu. The image copied is as per the image displayed in the Hydromax view window. These pictures can then be pasted into other applications or the Hydromax Report window. To copy a simple bitmap image of the view at the current resolution, use Ctrl+I; additionally, a bitmap of the current image may be saved by pressing Ctrl+Shift+I Copying Tables

Tables may be copied to the clipboard. Simply select a cell, row, column, range of cells or the whole table and then choose the Copy command or Ctrl+C. The data copied from the table will be placed on the clipboard and can then be pasted into a spreadsheet or word processor for further work. Note: Copying data from the table with the Shift key depressed, will also copy the column headings. Printing

Each of the windows in Hydromax may be printed. Simply bring the window you wish to print to the front and choose Print from the File menu. Views of the hull in the View window may be printed to scale as in Maxsurf. Prior to printing you may wish to set up the paper size and orientation by using the Page Setup command from the File menu. Print Preview

The page to be printed is initially displayed in print preview mode. To print the page click the Print button, otherwise click the Cancel button. The printing may be forced to be black and white. Choose the Colours button and select the options required. Note that the print preview is not refreshed after these changes, but the selection will be reflected in the printout. The titles may be edited by clicking the Titles button. Graph Printing to Scale

When printing the graph, it is possible to ensure that the graph is plotted to a sensible scale so that measurements can be made directly from the graph. To do this, hold the shift key down when selecting the print command for the graph. You will be asked if you want to print the graph to scale or to fill the page:

Page 148


The scale used will depend on the length units that are currently selected. If these are metric, then the graph will be plotted so that the grid lines are at one of the following intervals (If the current length units are imperial then similar intervals will be used, but they will be inches instead of cm.): 1.0cm, 2.0cm, 2.5cm, 5.0cm. Exporting a Bitmap Image

You may also export a bitmap of the rendered perspective view with the File | Export | Bitmap Image command. Select View from Analysis Data

For most analyses, each step from the analysis can be visualised when the analysis has completed. For example: the angle of downflooding can be visualised by returning to the Stability table in the results window, selecting the column at the required heel angle and select “Select View From Data” in the Display menu.

In the View window the hull will be displayed in the selected position. This can also be done for Upright Hydrostatics and the different wave phase calculations for an Equilibrium analysis in a waveform. The Select View from Data can also be used to display the Curve of Areas graph for each intermediate analysis stage, see Graph type on page 179. Saving the Hydromax Design

Hydromax design data may be saved Saving in a Hydromax Design File Saving Input Files separately Saving in a Hydromax Design File

To save the design in one file, ensure that the View window is topmost and select Save from the File menu. The Hydromax data is saved in a .hmd file with the same name as the design. Saving Input Files separately

In addition to saving all the data together, the data in the individual tables such as loadcases, damage cases, compartment definition, key points etc., may also be saved separately. For more information on file properties and extensions in Hydromax, please see: File Extension Reference Table on page 289.

Page 149


Note Although all Hydromax model data is saved in the .hmd file automatically every time you press Save from any of the design windows, it is recommended to also save the Hydromax input files separately. This gives the option of loading common data into different design files. E.g. for comparing the characteristics of vessels which have only minor differences in hull shape and identical tank layouts and loadcases. Saving Loadcases to a File Once you have set up a loading spreadsheet, you can save it in a file on disk. This allows the same loading spreadsheet to be recalled at any time for use with the same design or with any other hull. To save the loadcase table, ensure the Loadcase window is topmost on the screen and choose Save Load Case from the File Menu. Selecting this option saves all the loads displayed in the current tab in the Loadcase window. Saving Damage Cases to a File Bring the Damage window to the front and select Save Damage Cases or Save Damage Cases As from the file menu. Saving Compartment Definitions to a File To save a compartment definition to a file, bring the Input window to the front and choose the compartment definition table; select Save Compartment Definition from the File menu. You will be asked to name the file and select where it is to be saved. Saving Input Window Tables To save a input window table to a file, bring the Input window to the front and choose the required input table; select Save from the File menu. You will be asked to name the file and select where it is to be saved. Saving Results to a File

Once you have performed an analysis, the data generated may be saved as a text file. This allows for further calculations to be done in a spreadsheet or for formatting to be done in Word, Excel or other programs. To save the data, ensure the Results window is topmost on the screen and choose the table containing the data you wish to save. Select Save or Save As from the File Menu. Selecting this option saves all the data currently displayed in the Results window. The Results files are saved as tab delimited text, meaning that they can be read directly into spreadsheets such as Excel with values being placed in individual spreadsheet cells. Exporting

The data export function in Hydromax is similar to Maxsurf. Some Hydromax-specific export features are described below.

Page 150


Data export dialog in Hydromax.

DXF export Contains all lines displayed in the active design window as closed poly-lines. In addition, each tank, compartment and non-buoyant volume is exported on a separate layer. This export function is particularly useful to export tank arrangement drawings. Note: The layer name is the same as the compartment name, so it is important to have unique compartment names. For more information on data export of DXF and IGES, please see the “Output of Data” section in the Maxsurf manual. Exporting the Model to Hydromax Version 8.0

After Hydromax version 8, a major change to the Hydromax file structure was made. Hydromax models created in versions greater than version 8.0 can be exported using the File | Export menu so that it is compatible with Hydromax version 8.0. All key points will become downflooding points in the version 8 file and any tank sounding pipe information will be lost.

Page 151

Chapter 4 Stability Criteria

Chapter 4 Stability Criteria This chapter describes how stability criteria are used in Hydromax. Stability criteria are evaluated for Large Angle Stability, Equilibrium and Limiting KG calculations. A fixed sub-set of criteria is used for the Floodable length analysis and these criteria are accessed in their own, simplified dialog. The following sections will be discussed: Criteria Concepts, an overview of what capabilities Hydromax offers with regards to stability criteria. Criteria Procedures, explanation how to work with the Hydromax criteria dialog to create your own custom set of criteria. Criteria Results, criteria evaluation results Nomenclature, explanation of terms and definitions

See also: Appendix B: Criteria file format Appendix C: Criteria Help Appendix D: Specific Criteria

Criteria Concepts Hydromax includes a wide range of template criteria (or: parent criteria) as well as predefined custom criteria such as IMO, HSC, DNV, ISO and more. Hydromax uses a single dialog to control all the stability criteria. This makes it quick and easy to set which criteria should be included for analysis and to change criteria parameters. It is also possible for users to create their own custom sets of criteria. Users may save, import and edit their criteria sets. These custom criteria files may be easily transferred via email. Criteria may be identified as intact or damage criteria (or both). This ensures that the correct criteria are evaluated and displayed during normal and batch analysis. Although all criteria are displayed in the criteria table, only criteria that are applicable are added to the report; i.e.: if the intact case is being computed, only the criteria that are selected for evaluation during an intact analysis will be evaluated and added to the report, similarly for the damage cases. Criteria results are added to the Report after a Large Angle Stability or Equilibrium analysis. However, only the applicable criteria are added to the report (although all are displayed in the Results table); i.e. after an Equilibrium analysis only those criteria that are evaluated from Equilibrium data are added, and after a Large Angle Stability analysis only GZ based criteria are added to the report. Help information relating to the use and parameters of each criterion is displayed in the lower right hand corner of the dialog. Criteria List Overview

Hydromax includes a wide range of criteria. These criteria are listed using in a tree control on the left-hand side of the criteria dialog. This section describes how this list of criteria can be divided up in to Parent heeling arms, Parent criteria, predefined custom criteria and user created custom criteria. This section also explains how all criteria can be divided up into two different criteria types: equilibrium and GZ curve based.

Page 153


The criteria tree list

Parent Calculations This folder contains calculations that are required for certain criteria parameters, for example, the roll-back angle required for the IMO IS code Severe wind and rolling (weather) criterion. These calculations may be referenced in certain criteria.

Parent calculations in Hydromax Criteria dialog

Parent Heeling Arms In most cases a ship is subject to specific heeling moments. Those heeling moment are then used in a number of different criteria. The Hydromax criteria list contains Parent Heeling Arms that can be copied into a custom criteria folder and then cross-referenced into the stability criteria.

Page 154


The advantage of using cross-referenced Heeling Arms is that a heeling arm is now defined (and edited) in only one place. This ensures that all criteria which use a specific heeling arm use exactly the same heeling arm. Another benefit is that, since the heeling arm is defined in one place, it is only displayed once in the GZ graph and not duplicated for each criterion that uses it. Furthermore some newer heeling arm criteria are only available for cross-referenced heeling arms and a greater variety of heeling arm definitions are available through cross-referencing. Parent Criteria The Parent Criteria group contains all the parent criteria types that are available in Hydromax. Each parent criterion allows you to perform a specific calculation; these are the fundamental criteria from which criteria for specific codes are derived. Parent criteria are special in that you cannot rename, delete or add criteria to the Parent Criteria group. Also the parent criteria settings cannot be saved, they will always revert to their default values when Hydromax is restarted. This is because the parent criteria are intended for use as templates from which you can derive your own custom criteria. This is done by dragging the required parent criteria in to the “My custom criteria” group or any other group you create. To distinguish the Parent criteria from your derived criteria, they are displayed in bold text in the Criteria list. Predefined Custom Criteria A number of criteria files containing criteria for specific codes are supplied with Hydromax. These may be found in the “HMSpecificCriteria” folder. This folder can be found in the Maxsurf root directory: c:\program files\Maxsurf. Most specific criteria are locked; those that are not locked require your ship design data to be input. Also see Working with Criteria Libraries on page 162 Appendix D: Specific Criteriaon page 273. Custom Criteria You can create your own set of criteria in the tree as well. This is explained in the section on Working with Criteria on page 158.

Page 155


Types of criteria

There are two fundamental types of criteria: Equilibrium criteria Equilibrium criteria are evaluated after an Equilibrium analysis and refer only to the condition of the vessel in its equilibrium state For example: margin line immersion tests, freeboard measurements, trim angle, metacentric height, etc. This type of criterion is also used by the Floodable Length analysis. Equilibrium criteria can be recognised by the

icon.

Criteria derived from measurements of the GZ curve. These are calculated after a Large Angle Stability analysis and during a Limiting KG analysis. For example, area under GZ curve between specified limits, angle of maximum GZ, etc. These criteria are often referred to as Large Angle Stability (LAS) or GZ criteria. Note that there is some cross-over between the criteria types, notably angle of equilibrium heel. This can be measured from the GZ curve by looking for an up-crossing of the GZ=0 axis. The equilibrium heel angle is also a fundamental output of the Equilibrium analysis. The same also applies for GMt. For this reason, in some criteria sets some criteria are included twice, once in the form of an Equilibrium criterion and again as a Large Angle Stability criterion. For a criterion to be used in the search for maximum VCG in the Limiting KG analysis, it must be a LAS criterion. This is because it is only this type of criteria that is more likely to pass as VCG is reduced. A check is also made to ensure that any selected Equilibrium criteria are passed, but they cannot be included directly in the search algorithm. You will notice that different icons are used to differentiate between different types of criteria. These icons are derived from the parent criterion type. The different types of criteria and their icons are described below: Folder icon, create separate folders to store related criteria. All folders must have unique names (even if the parent folders have different names). Equilibrium criterion. These criteria are evaluated only after an equilibrium analysis has been performed. GZ criterion. These criteria make measurements from the GZ curved obtained from a Large Angle Stability analysis. GZ area criterion GZ criterion with heeling arm GZ area criterion with heeling arm GZ criterion with several heeling arms and their combinations GZ area criterion with several heeling arms and their combinations Combined GZ criterion. These criteria perform several individual tests on the GZ curve. e.g. STIX. Combined GZ heeling arm criterion. These criteria perform several individual tests on the GZ curve including a heeling arm. e.g. Weather criterion. See next: Criteria Procedures

Page 156


Criteria Procedures This section describes how to work with the stability criteria dialog. Starting the Criteria dialog Resizing the Criteria dialog Working with Criteria Editing Criteria Working with Criteria Libraries

Starting the Criteria dialog

The criteria dialog allows you to select which criteria are selected for inclusion in the analysis and change their parameters. To bring up the Criteria dialog, select Criteria from the Analysis menu:

or use the Criteria button,

, in the analysis toolbar:

Page 157


The criteria dialog is shown below:

Note: The Floodable Length analysis uses its own set of criteria. The criteria command will bring up the Floodable Length Criteria dialog when the Floodable Length analysis is selected. Resizing the Criteria dialog

The dialog may be resized and a vertical and horizontal slider can be used to resize the width of the Criteria List and the height of the Criterion Details areas. Note that if, in the unlikely event that the dialog items vanish due to resizing the dialog, the dialog size can be reset by holding down the “Shift” key when you open the dialog. This behaviour is the same as all other resizing dialogs. Working with Criteria

In the Concepts section it was explained how the criteria are listed in a tree list. This section explains how to create and customise your own criteria from the Parent Heeling Arms and Criteria provided with Hydromax. Page 158


Using the Criteria Tree List

The tree works in much the same way as the file folders in Windows Explorer: 

Click on the “+” sign to expand the folder (or double click on it).



Click on the “-” sign to collapse the group (or double click on it).



Click on an item’s name or icon to select it



Once selected, click again on the on the item’s name to edit its name

Some short-cut keys for the tree list: Tree control smart keys Alt+Keypad * Right Arrow or Alt+Keypad + Left Arrow or Alt+ Keypad Up Arrow Down Arrow Space

Function Recursively expands the current group completely Expands the current group Collapses the current group Move one item up tree Move one item down tree Include criterion for analysis

Criteria Tree Right-click Context Menu

Several options are available by right-clicking on a criterion or criterion group:

Criterion right-click menu

Include for Analysis: Toggle whether the criterion (or all criteria within the group) should be evaluated. Intact: Toggle whether the criterion (or all criteria within the group) should be evaluated for intact conditions. Damage: Toggle whether the criterion (or all criteria within the group) should be evaluated for damaged conditions. Lock: Toggle whether the criterion (or all criteria within the group) are locked. If a criterion is locked, this prevents inadvertent editing of its parameters. Locking is used for criteria belonging to specific codes where the required values are fixed.

Page 159


Add Group: Add a new criterion group. Cut: Cut the criterion (or whole criterion group) to the clipboard. This may then be pasted into another location in the tree. Copy: Copy the criterion (or whole criterion group) to the clipboard. This may then be pasted into another location in the tree. Paste: Paste the criterion (or whole criterion group) from the clipboard to the selected location Rename: Renames the criterion or group. This may also be done by selecting the label, then clicking again in the label. Delete: Deletes the criterion or all the criteria and sub-groups within the group. Defining new Custom Criteria and Groups

New custom criteria sets may be created by first creating a new criterion group and then dragging the desired criteria into the criterion group. By holding down the Ctrl button a copy of the criterion being dragged is created (unless it is a parent criterion, in which case a copy will be made regardless of whether the Ctrl key is held down or not). Alternatively use the Copy and Paste functions from the right-click context menu (see above). It is extremely important to ensure that all criteria groups have unique names. If duplicate group names exit, then loading the criteria file may cause unexpected results. As criteria (and new groups) are loaded they are inserted into the first group that is found with a name that matches the name of the group to which the criterion should belong. If there are groups with the same name, all criteria that should be in a group of that name will end up in the first one and none in the second. Moving Criteria

Criteria may be moved from one group to another by dragging them with the left-mousebutton or by using the cut and paste functions in the right-click context menu (see above). Note that if you drag a criterion from the Parent Criteria group a copy will be made and the original will not be deleted. Copying criteria

You can use the Criteria Tree Right-click Context Menu to copy and paste criteria. Alternatively, you can hold down the CTRL-key while moving the criteria you will copy the criteria. Selecting the Criteria for Analysis

Criteria may be selected for analysis by ticking the tick box to the left of the criterion. Other functions are available from a menu activated when the right button is clicked on your mouse. To select an entire group, right-click on the group and choose Include for Analysis from the menu. Editing Criteria

The specific details for a criterion are displayed in the table in the top-right of the dialog: Page 160


Criterion details table

To edit the parameters for a specific criterion, click on the criterion‟s name in the tree and the criterion‟s parameters will be displayed in the table on the right. Edit the parameters as required and then select the next criterion to be edited from the tree, or click the dialog‟s Close button. Please note that the criteria are updated as you change their data and that there is no “Cancel” function for this dialog. If in doubt, use the File | Save Criteria command to save a copy of your current criteria selection and data before making any changes in the Criteria dialog. The parameters that may be adjusted have a white background; those which cannot be edited, have a grey background. The values that are required for passing a criterion are in bold. Check Boxes in Criteria Properties Section of Criteria Dialog

There is some subtly different behaviour for the check boxes in the dialog depending on their context. In most cases there will be group of related options used to define a criterion parameter. For example the limits for an upper integration range or the individual criteria to be evaluated for a more complex criterion:

In both of these cases the selection is cumulative and none of the selections are mutually exclusive. However, at least one must be selected.

In other cases, where the items are mutually exclusive, the check boxes act as radio buttons and only one may be selected. This occurs, for example, with the “Value of GMt at” criterion:

Page 161


Finally a check box can be used to select whether a specific effect should be included, for example, GZ curve reduction in the wind heeling criteria:

Criterion Pass/Fail Test

There are some subtle differences between the wordings for different criteria. For example one criterion may state “Shall be greater than…”, whereas another may state “Shall not be less than…”. Hydromax allows you to make this distinction by selecting the required comparison from a combo-box in the criterion row of the details table:

Description Shall be greater than Shall not be less than Shall be less than Shall not be greater than

Symbol > ≥ < ≤

Logical test Greater than Greater than or equal to Less than Less than or equal to

Damage and Intact

Criteria may be defined as intact or damage stability criteria (or both). Intact criteria are only evaluated for the intact case and damage criteria are evaluated when a damage case has been selected (irrespective of whether there are actually any damaged compartments or tanks in the damage case). Criteria that are defined for both are always evaluated. A third option which is not yet implemented is WOD (Water on deck) this checkbox has no effect. These options may either be set using the right-click menu or by ticking the appropriate boxes in the bottom of the dialog:

Intact and Damage tick-boxes.

Working with Criteria Libraries

It is possible to load and save the criteria. The parent criteria, built into Hydromax are not saved, only the criteria that you create or import will be saved. Default Criteria Library File

When starting, Hydromax will try to open the default criteria library file called: “Hydromax Criteria Library.hcr” from the directory in which the Hydromax program resides. By default this is c:\program files\Maxsurf\ Hydromax Criteria Library.hcr. If this file cannot be found, you will be prompted to locate a criteria file: You may select an alternative file or click the Cancel button to proceed and be given the default criteria, which consists of the Parent criteria and a “My Custom Criteria” group.

Page 162


The default criteria library will be automatically updated every time the criteria dialog is closed. Even if you loaded an alternative file, updates will be saved in the default criteria library, either overwriting the existing one or creating a new one. Note It is good practise to save the criteria file with the project in the project folder. That way, when at a later stage you need to re-analyse the project, all criteria are still available. See Saving Criteria below. Saving Criteria

It is also possible to save the criteria into a new file. This can be useful when you are defining new custom sets of criteria that you wish to keep separate or when defining criteria sets for different vessels. Choose Save Criteria As from the File menu. This will simply export all the custom criteria (parent criteria are not saved) to the specified file. Further updates will, however, continue to be saved to the default criteria library file that was opened when Hydromax was first started, so if you want to save any further changes you will have to resave as described above. Importing Criteria and Specific Criteria Files

New criteria may be added to your criteria list by importing them – choose Import Criteria from the File menu. You will then be asked if you wish to keep the existing criteria:

If you choose “Yes” your existing criteria will be kept, if you choose “No”, all existing criteria except the parent criteria will be removed and replaced by those in the file you are opening. The default criteria library will be over-written with the new criteria so if you wish to keep any custom criteria that you may have added to your default criteria library, you must save them in a new file first. Note that when keeping your existing criteria, it is important to ensure that the group names in the file you are importing are not the same as those that already exist. If this does occur, the imported criteria will be found in the original groups, not in the new groups. A number of criteria containing criteria for specific codes are supplied with Hydromax. These may be found in the “HMSpecificCriteria” folder. You can import several criteria files in one go using Shift, or Ctrl select to select multiple files in the Open Hydromax Criteria dialog.

Page 163


Criteria File Format

The criteria are saved in a Hydromax criteria file with the extension .hcr. The file is a normal PC text file, which may be edited manually so as to generate custom criteria. The typical format of the file is given in the following file: c:\Program Files\Maxsurf\\HMCriteriaHelp\CriteriaHelp.html. Editing this file will also allow you to add your own help text or associate rich text format help files (rtf) files with your criteria.

Criteria Results After a Large Angle Stability or Equilibrium analysis, criteria are evaluated and the results displayed in the Stability Criteria table in the Results window. Criteria can also be re-evaluated without having to redo the analysis when “Close and Recalculate” is selected in the criteria dialog. This allows you to edit criteria parameters or selected criteria and re-evaluate using the existing analysis results. After calculation the relevant criteria are also added to the Report. Criteria Results Table

The tested criteria are listed one above the other. Intermediate values are displayed. Values that could not be calculated, e.g.: angle of vanishing stability, angle of equilibrium, etc., have n/a in the Actual and/or Value column. This is normally due to an insufficient range of heel angle having been used. Results may be displayed in “Verbose” or “Compact” format (see above). The format for the results table and the report are specified separately. Chose the Display | Data Format command when the Stability Criteria results are displayed:

Page 164


Stability criteria results window: compact format

Stability criteria results window: verbose format

Page 165


Report and Batch Processing

As noted earlier, only the relevant criteria results are added to the Report and/or Batch file. Criteria that are not relevant, i.e. any criteria that have a “not analysed” result, are not added to the Report (although they are displayed in the Criteria Results table). For example damage criteria during intact analysis or Equilibrium criteria during a Large Angle Stability analysis are not added to the report. Also see Reporting on page 145 Batch Analysis on page 128

Nomenclature This section gives a brief description of the various values that are determined by Hydromax in the evaluation of criteria. There are two distinct types of criteria: Equilibrium criteria Equilibrium criteria are evaluated after an Equilibrium analysis and refer only to the condition of the vessel in its equilibrium state For example: margin line immersion tests, freeboard measurements, trim angle, metacentric height, etc. This type of criterion is also used by the Floodable Length analysis. Equilibrium criteria can be recognised by the

icon.

Criteria derived from measurements of the GZ curve. These are calculated after a Large Angle Stability analysis and during a Limiting KG analysis. For example, area under GZ curve between specified limits, angle of maximum GZ, etc. These criteria are often referred to as Large Angle Stability (LAS) or GZ criteria. Note: The metacentre is always (even for Large Angle Stability criteria) computed directly from the vessel‟s hydrostatic properties (i.e. water-plane inertia and immersed volume) at the specified heel angle and not from the slope of the GZ curve. This gives an accurate result that is not dependent on the heel angles and intervals tested during the analysis. Definitions of GZ curve features

Some typical GZ curves are shown below, the third graph shows the GZ curve with a heeling arm overlayed.

Page 166


Typical GZ curve

Unusual GZ curve with double peak

Page 167


GZ curve with heeling arm superimposed GZ Definitions

The table below defines how Hydromax calculates the various features of the GZ curve: Angle of vanishing stability Angle of vanishing stability with heeling arm curve Downflooding angle Equilibrium angle Equilibrium angle with heeling arm curve First peak in GZ curve

Page 168

The angle of vanishing stability is the smallest positive angle where the GZ curve crosses the GZ=0 axis with negative slope. The angle of vanishing stability with a given heeling arm is the smallest positive angle where the GZ curve crosses the heel arm curve and where the GZ-Heel Arm curve has negative slope. The downflooding angle is the smallest positive angle at which a downflooding point becomes immersed. The equilibrium angle is the angle closest to zero where the GZ curve crosses the GZ=0 axis with positive slope. The equilibrium angle with a given heeling arm is the angle closest to zero where the GZ curve crosses the heel arm curve where the GZ-Heel Arm curve has positive slope. In some cases, the GZ curve may have multiple peaks; this often occurs if the vessel has a large watertight cabin. The angle of the first peak is the lowest positive angle at which a local maximum in the GZ curve occurs.


GML or GMT

GZ Curve Heeling arm curve

Maximum GZ Maximum GZ above heeling arm curve

Vertical separation of the longitudinal or transverse metacentre and centre of gravity. The location of the metacentre is computed from the water-plane inertia, not the slope of the GZ curve. Note that the centre of gravity used is the upright centre of gravity corrected by the free surface moments of partially filled tanks in their upright condition, rotated to the specified heel (and trim) angle. The curve of vessel righting arm (GZ) plotted against vessel heel angle A curve of heeling lever, which is superimposed on the GZ curve. This is typically used to assess the effects of external heeling moments, which are applied to the vessel. These include the effects of wind, passenger crowding, centripetal effects of tuning, etc. Depending on the moment that they represent, the heeling arm curves will have different shapes. The heeling arms are never allowed to be negative; if the cos function goes negative, the heeling arm is made zero. If the heeling arm has a power of cos greater than zero, the heeling arm is forced to be zero at heel angles greater than 90° and less than -90°. Positive angle at which the value of GZ is a maximum Positive angle at which the value of (GZ - heel arm) is a maximum

Glossary

The table below describes some commonly used terms: Angle of heel measured from upright. Deck Slope / maximum slope Gust Ratio g = 9.80665ms-2 Roll back angle

The maximum slope of an initially horizontal, flat deck at the resultant vessel heel and trim. i.e. combined effect of heel and trim. Used for some wind heeling criteria, the Gust Ratio is the ratio of the magnitude of the gust wind heeling arm to the steady wind heeling arm. 1998 CODATA recommended value for standard acceleration of gravity A negative heel angle change. Often a roll back angle is measured from some equilibrium position; the resulting heel angle after the roll back has been applied is more negative than the original. Commonly used in wind and weather criteria to account for the action of waves rolling the vessel into the wind. If a criterion uses a roll back angle, it is often necessary to calculate the GZ curve for negative angles of heel.

Page 169

Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference

Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference This chapter contains brief descriptions of the tools available in Hydromax: Windows Toolbars Menus

Windows Hydromax uses a range of graphical, tabular, graph and report windows. View Window Loadcase Window Damage Window Input Window Results Window Graph Window Report Window

Assembly View and Property Sheet

An assembly view has been added to Hydromax, this makes it easier to control the visibility of individual tanks and surfaces. The Properties sheet can be used to change tank properties of the tank currently selected in the Assembly or design View. View Window

The View window displays the hull, frame of reference, immersed sections of the hull and any compartments, and the centroids of gravity, buoyancy, and flotation. These positions are represented by: cb cg cf K

centre of buoyancy centre of gravity centre of flotation location of keel (K) for KN during KN analysis

You can choose which type of view is displayed by selecting from the Window menu or the View toolbar. The Zoom, Shrink, Pan and Home View commands from the View menu may be used and work in exactly the same way as in Maxsurf. If a Perspective view is shown, you may also use the Pitch, Roll and Yaw indicators to change the angle of view. Please refer to the Maxsurf manual if you are unfamiliar with these functions. You may set the visibility of the various display elements by using the Visibility command from the Display menu. Two sets of visibility flags are maintained, one is used for all analyses other than tank calibration and the other is used for when the tank calibration analysis is selected. Page 171


If a view window is visible when an analysis is being carried out, it will display the hull shape using the correct heel trim and immersion for the current step of the analysis. After an analysis, the Select View from Data command in the Display menu may be used to move the hull to a selected position from the Results window. The view of the tanks, compartments and non-buoyant volumes can be toggled between an outline view and a view of the sections. Perspective view

In the perspective view, the model may be rendered.

The rendered view also enables tanks and compartments to be more easily visualised, especially when the hull shell is made transparent.

The rendering options are to be found in the Display menu, with further lighting options in the Render toolbar. Please refer to the Maxsurf manual for more information on the different rendering options available in perspective view.

Page 172


Note: Fastest performance will be achieved by reducing the amount of redrawing that is required from Hydromax. For this reason, it is best to turn off sections, and especially waterlines, when performing an analysis. You may then turn them on again after the analysis has completed. For fastest performance, e.g. when running in Batch mode, minimise the Hydromax window so that no redrawing occurs.

Loadcase Window

In the Loadcase window a spreadsheet table of all loads and tanks is displayed.

Using the tabs on the bottom of the window allow you to quickly browse through the different loadcases. Hydromax allows you to improve the presentation of the Load Case window by adding blank, heading or sub-total lines in the table. For more information see Working with Loadcases on page 35. The columns that are displayed may be selected using the Display | Data Format dialog. Damage Window

The Damage window is used to specify which tanks and compartments are flooded in each damage case. There is always an Intact case, which cannot be edited, this is the default condition. If flooded volumes are required in the intact case they should be defined as non-buoyant volumes.

Page 173


Input Window

The Input window contains tables where the additional Hydromax design data is entered. The tables in the Input window contain the: Compartment Definition Sounding Pipes Key Points Margin Line Points Modulus Points Bulkhead locations

The input window contains tabs on the bottom that allow you to quickly browse through the different input tables. Compartment Definition

This table can be used to define the tanks and compartments in the Hydromax models. For more information see Modelling Compartments on page 48 in the Analysis Input section. Sounding Pipes

This table is used to define the tank sounding pipes and calibration intervals. Default values are provided but these may be edited if necessary.

Page 174


Key Points

There are several types of Key Points: Down Flooding points Potential Down flooding points Embarkation points Immersion Points

Only downflooding points are used in determining the downflooding angle, which is used in criteria evaluation. Margin Line Points

The margin line is used in a number of the criteria. Hydromax automatically calculates the position of the margin line 76mm below the deck edge when the hull is first read in. If necessary, the points on the margin line may be edited manually in the Margin Line Points window (the deck edge is automatically updated so that it is kept 76mm above the margin line). Modulus Points

This table is used to define the allowable limits for shear force and bending moment during the longitudinal strength calculations. Bulkheads

See Floodable Length Bulkheads on page 74. Results Window

The Results window contains ten tables, one for each of the different analysis types plus criteria results and key points results tables. When switching mode, the currently selected results table will change to reflect the current analysis mode. Note that results are never invalidated if analysis options are modified – it is up to the user to ensure that the results are recalculated as necessary. Setting the Data Format

It is possible to configure Hydromax so that only the results that you wish to see are displayed. To do this, choose Data Format from the Display menu.

Page 175


A dialog similar to the one above will appear. Items that are selected with a tick will be displayed in the Results window and on any printed output. Items that are not selected are still calculated during the analysis cycle, but are not displayed. You may change the display format at any time after the analysis without having to redo the calculations. The data available for display depends on the analysis. Data Layout

Most analysis data can be formatted vertically or horizontally to fit better on the screen or the printed page. For example, with Upright Hydrostatics, the data can be formatted so that each draft has a column of results, or so that each draft is on a separate row.

To change the format, select Data Format from the Display menu, and select either the horizontal or vertical layout button. Key Points Data Result Window

Key points data is calculated for Large Angle Stability, Equilibrium and Specified condition Analysis. The DF angle column is only visible when the analysis mode is set to Large Angle Stability and the Freeboard column is only displayed when the analysis mode is set to Equilibrium or Specified condition. Page 176


Stability Criteria Result Window

If stability criteria are turned on in the analysis menu, they will be evaluated during Large Angle Stability, Limiting KG and Equilibrium analyses. The results of the criteria evaluation are presented in this table after Large Angle Stability and Equilibrium analyses. Criteria results are not displayed in this table after a Limiting KG analysis. The results may be displayed in compact format:

Alternatively, the results can be displayed in verbose format, where all the intermediate calculations are shown, by selecting the desired format in the Display | Data format dialog.

Page 177


Graph Window

The Graph window displays graphs, which show the results of the current analysis. Hydromax will automatically display the graph that displays the result of the current analysis when you select Graph from the Windows menu or press the toolbar button. Alternatively you can select a specific graph using the Windows | Graphs menu item. Only the graphs that are applicable to the current analysis can be displayed. Graphs can be copied using the Edit | Copy command. Depending on the analysis mode, different graphs are available. Upright Hydrostatics Analysis: Hydrostatics Curves of Form Curve of areas – different graph for each draft tested (selected using Display|Select view from data)

Large angle stability Analysis Righting Lever (GZ) Curve of areas – different graph for each heel angle tested (selected using Display|Select view from data) Max steady heel angle Large angle stability (hydrostatic data other than GZ) Curves of Form Dynamic stability (GZ area)

Equilibrium Analysis: Curve of areas

Specified condition Analysis: Curve of areas

KN Values Analysis: Cross curves (KN)

Limiting KG Analysis: Limiting KG

Floodable length Analysis: Floodable length

Longitudinal strength Analysis: Longitudinal strength Curve of areas

Tank Calibration One graph for each tank

For many graphs you can select what is plotted and other options with the Display | Data Format dialog.

Page 178


Graph type

Hydromax can graph many types of data depending on the type of analysis being performed. These graphs include Upright Hydrostatics, Curves of Form, Curve of Areas, Righting Lever (GZ curve), Longitudinal Strength, Floodable Length and Tank Capacities. These can all be displayed via the Graphs item in the Windows menu. Tip: You can use the Select View from Analysis Data option (page 148) to see the Curve of Areas for each heel angle and/or intermediate stage during the analysis. Interpolating Graph Data

To display an interpolated value from one of the curves, use the mouse to click anywhere on the curve. The data in the lower left corner of the window will change to display the curve name and co-ordinates of the mouse on the curve. Click anywhere on the dashed line and drag it with the mouse; as you move the cursor the interpolated values will be displayed.

Note: In case multiple curves are plotted in the same graph you can switch between the curves by clicking on them. Hydromax will ignore the exact position you click on the curve to allow reading all related interpolated values along the black dashed line. GZ Graph

The GZ value, Area and corresponding heel angle can be measured by using the slider; the slider data is displayed at the bottom of the Graph window. The area is integrated from zero heel angle to the location of the graph slider. Note: Because the horizontal axis scale is always in degrees, the area is always given in units of length.degrees and cannot be displayed in units of length.radians. Page 179


Note The lower integration limit is always zero (irrespective of the equilibrium angle). Thus if you require the area between two limits, you must subtract the area at the lower limit from the area at the higher limit. Curve fitting for GZ graph

A curve fit will be performed if all the heel angle intervals are less than or equal to 10˚. If this is the case, a parametric cubic spline is used to fit a smooth curve through the calculated GZ data at the specified heel angles. This ensures that the fitted line goes exactly through the calculated GZ points. If you wish to prevent this curve fitting, add a heel angle interval of greater than 10˚ as the final step. This can sometimes be useful if you expect a discontinuity in the GZ curve. Graph data

The graphed data can be obtained by double clicking on the graph. Since the graph data contains more data points than most tables in the results window, this double click can be extremely helpful to export the analysis data to for example Excel fro further processing. Especially in the case of the sectional area curve, where there is no tabular data available. Also see: Copying Tables on page 147. Graph Formatting

When you are in the Graph window you can use the View | Colours and lines dialog to change the colours of the curves in the graph as well as the background. The View | Font command allows you to change the text size and font size. Copying Graphs

You can copy the contents of the Graph window using the Copy command or Ctrl+C. Note that the picture is placed in the clipboard as a meta-file which can be resized in Word or Excel.

Page 180


Note When the graph is pasted in Microsoft Word®, the graph can be edited by right clicking on the graph and selecting “edit picture”. Report Window

Hydromax contains a Report window. This window is used to create a progressive summary of the analyses that have been carried out. This report can be edited via Cut, Copy and Paste; printed, saved to and recalled from a disk file. Report Window Page Setup

When you are in the Report window, the File | Page setup command allows you to customise the page orientation and size you wish to use for reporting. This is important because, inserted tables will be automatically formatted to fit the current page set up. However, once the tables have been placed into the report, their formatting will not be changed by changes to the print set up. Hence it is often most convenient to select the desired report page set up before any analyses have been made. You can for example choose the landscape Page Setup prior to running an analysis to make the tables fit better. Hydromax will split most results tables so they fit the specified page set up. However, both Loadcase and Criteria results tables will not be split. Editing a Report

The Report window has it's own toolbar permanently attached to the view, as well as a ruler showing you tab stops, indentation and margin widths. Underneath all of this you have your actual editing area. As the built-in report window only has basic editing and formatting functionality, it is recommended that the report window be used only to accumulate the results. Once all the results have been gathered in the report window, these should be saved and opened in a word processor such as Microsoft Word or Open Office for formatting: set the results tables up as you want them to appear in the report (the report uses the same column widths, fonts etc.); do the same for the graph widow; choose an appropriate paper size for the report (the tables will be split to fit this paper size, so choosing a wide paper size will prevent all but the widest tables from being split); copy and paste the Hydromax report into Microsoft word. Use the Format | Autoformat function in Word (with the default settings) to set the correct styles for the different levels of heading in the document, this will facilitate generating a table of contents and also allows you to re-format the various styles (or import a custom set of styles using the style organiser in Word).

Page 181


The information below is provided for reference, but it is strongly recommended not to use any of the formatting commands in the Report window. The toolbar has a number of buttons that allow you to change either the current settings, or the section of text that is currently highlighted. The toolbar contains the following items: Font combo box Font Size combo box Bold Italic Underline Colour Left Justify Centre Justify Right Justify Bullet

Use this to change the current font Use this to change the current font size Use this to toggle the Bold style Use this to toggle the Italic style Use this to toggle the Underline style Use this to set Text Colour Use this to set Left Justification Use this to set Centre Justification Use this to set Right Justification Use this to toggle Bullet Points

The Ruler comes in two formats, in metric and in inches - the format you have displayed on your screen depends on the current Dimension Units you have (use Units in the Display menu to change this). The format shown below is metric.

Page 182


The Ruler allows you to set left, right, centre, and decimal tab stops. The tab stops are very useful for creating columns and tables. A paragraph can have as many as 20 tab positions. The 'left' tab stop indicates where the text following the tab character will start. To create a left tab stop, click the left mouse button at the specified location on the ruler. The left tab stop is indicated on the ruler by an arrow with a tail toward the right. The 'right' tab stop aligns the text at the current tab stop such that the text ends at the tab marker. To create a right tab stop, click the right mouse button at the specified location on the ruler. The right tab stop is indicated on the ruler by an arrow with a tail toward the left. The 'centre' tab stop centres the text at the current tab position. To create a centre tab stop, hold the shift key and click the left mouse button at the specified location on the ruler. The centre tab stop is indicated on the ruler by a straight arrow. The 'decimal' tab stop aligns the text at the decimal point. To create a decimal tab stop, hold the shift key and click the right mouse button at the specified location on the ruler. The decimal tab stop is indicated on the ruler by a dot under a straight arrow. To move a tab position using the mouse, simply click the left mouse button on the tab symbol on the ruler. While the mouse button is depressed, drag the tab to the desired location and release the mouse button. To clear a tab position, simply click on the desired tab marker and drag it off the ruler. Normally, a tab command is applicable to every line of the current paragraph. However, if you highlight a block of text before initiating a tab command, the tab command is then applicable to all the lines in the highlighted block of text. Keyboard Support for Reports

In addition to menu support, there are also several useful keystrokes that are available while editing the report. These are listed below for convenience: Ctrl+B Toggle Bold on/off Ctrl+U Toggle Underline on/off Ctrl+PageUp Ctrl+PageDown

Position at the top of the report Position at the bottom of the report

Ctrl+Enter

Insert a page break

Opening and Saving the Report

The report can be saved to a file or read in from a file using the Save and Open Menu commands with the report window highlighted. This is useful if you wish to append an analysis to a report that had been calculated at some time in the past. (Load in the old report, perform the analyses; the new results will be appended to the end of the report which may then be resaved).

Page 183


Pasting images into the report

Sometimes, it is desirable to insert schematic images of the vessel into the report. This is very easily done, by copying an image from one of the design views and then pasting it into the report at the desired location. The image copied is as per the image displayed in the Hydromax view window. Ensure that the colors selected will be easily visible in the white background of the report view. Depending on which Microsoft operating system you are using (notably Win98), the image may not maintain its aspect ratio and may be pasted into the report as a square. To overcome this problem, paste the image into Microsoft Word first, then copy it from Word back into the Hydromax report window.

Toolbars Hydromax has a number of icons arranged in toolbars to speed up access to some commonly used functions. You can hold your mouse over an icon to reveal a pop-up tip of what the icon does.

File Toolbar

The File toolbar contains icons that execute the following commands: New – Open – Save – Cut – Copy – Paste – Print Edit Toolbar

The Edit toolbar contains icons that execute the following commands: Add Row - Delete Row | Sort Loadcase Rows – Move Loadcase/Tank Row up – Move Loadcase/Tank Row Down View Toolbar

The View toolbar contains icons that execute the following commands: Zoom – Shrink – Pan – Home View – Rotate – Assembly window.

Page 184


The Rotate command is only available in the Perspective window. The Assembly window is not available in Hydromax. Analysis Toolbar

The Analysis toolbar contains icons for selecting the current analysis, loadcase and damage case: Analysis Type – Current Loadcase – Current Damage Case

The Analysis toolbar also contains icons that execute the following commands: Criteria (dialog) | Start Analysis – Pause Analysis – Resume Analysis | Update Tank Values in Loadcase The “Update Tank Values in Loadcase” is exactly the same as the menu command for “Recalculate Tanks and Compartments on page 195. Window Toolbar

Allows quick switching between commonly used windows: Perspective – Plan – Profile – Body Plan | Loadcase – Damage Case | Compartment – Downflooding – Margin Line – Modulus – Bulkheads | Results for Current Analysis – Criteria Results – Key Point Results | Graph – Report Design Grid Toolbar

The Design Grid toolbar contains icons that show or hide various items in the graphical views Frame of Reference (always on) | Toggle Design Grid Visibility Design Grid | Design Grid Labels | Design Grid Tickmarks Visibility Toolbar

The Visibility toolbar contains icons that show or hide various items in the graphical views: Sections – Datum Waterline – Waterlines | Key Points – Margin Line | Loadcase mass items | Tanks – Damaged Tanks – Compartments – Damaged Compart. – Linked Negative Compartment. – NBV – Tank Names – Tank Fluid Level – Tank Sections – Tank Outlines | Probabilistic Damage Zones * NBV = Non Buoyant Volume

Page 185


Edge VIsibility Toolbar

The Visibility toolbar contains icons that show or hide various items in the graphical views: Hull Surface Edges – Internal Surface Edges – Feature Edges – Bonded Edges Render Toolbar

Render – Render transparent – Toggle custom light 1 – Toggle custom light 2 – Toggle custom light 3 – Toggle custom light 4 – Customise light settings

Report Toolbar

Spool results to report View (extended) Toolbar

Set Home View – Colour – Font – Preferences – Properties Design Grid Toolbar

Display Frame of Reference (always on) – Display Design Grid – Show Grid – Show Labels – Show Ticks Extra Buttons ToolbarToolbar

Add surface areas to loadcase – Preferences | Heel – Trim – Draft – Displacement – Displacement – Specified Condition – Permiability – Fluid simulation – Densities – Waveform – Grounding – Batch Analysis Data Format – Units – Coefficients – Set to DWL – Set View from Data –Visibility Dialog – Show Single Section

Page 186


This toolbar provides a number of buttons for commonly used commands in case you should wish to customise your toolbars.

Menus The following section describes all of the menu commands available in the Hydromax program. File Menu Edit Menu View Menu Case Menu Analysis Menu Display Menu Data Menu Window Menu Help Menu

File Menu

The File menu contains commands for opening and saving files and printing. New

Creates a new table for whichever input table is frontmost, e.g: when the Loadcase Condition is the frontmost window, the New command will create a new loading condition. When the Compartment Definition table is frontmost, New creates a new compartment definition. Open

When no design is open, selecting the Open command will show a dialog box with a list of available Maxsurf designs. Select the design you wish to open, click the Open button. The requested design will be read in and its hull shape calculated for use in Hydromax. If a design is already open, the Open command will open whichever file corresponds to the frontmost input window. Close

The Close command will delete the data in the frontmost window. Hydromax will ask whether you wish to save any changes. Selecting Close when one of the design view windows is frontmost will close the current Maxsurf design. Save

Selecting Save will save the contents of the frontmost window to a file on the disk. Save As

Selecting Save As performs the same function as save but allows you to specify a new filename preventing the original file from being overwritten. Import

Allows import of file types other than Maxsurf design files Page 187


nuShallo Allows direct import of a nuShallo pan file. GHS Allows direct import of a GHS geometry file. A full GHS model file may be imported directly into Hydromax for analysis. Because the GHS file does not contain a full, interconneceted, three-dimensional model of the hull, the geometry is locked: the tank geometry is locked and tanks cannot be added to the model. The full model including critical points, tanks and sounding pipes are read from the GHS file. The following limitations currently apply, but will be removed in subsequent versions: Hydromax supports only a single buoyant hull part. The buoyant hull part with the most sections is loaded from the GHS file. Linked negative tanks are not supported in Hydromax. Any container parts with elements with negative effectiveness will be read in as tanks. All other cotainers are read in as tanks. Sail parts are ignored Export

Selecting Export enables you to export a Hydromax file as a variety of different file formats such as: DXF or IGES DXF exports sections as closed poly-lines. In addition, each tank, compartment and non-buoyant volume is exported on a separate layer (the layer name being the same as the compartment name, so it is important to have unique compartment names). IGES exports the NURB surface data. See the Maxsurf manual for more information. GHS If you have a Hydrolink license, you may export the Hydromax model to a GHS geometry file. The hull, tanks and compartments and key points are all exported. To enable the export command, chose Edit | Activate GHS export. Hydromax supports only a single buoyant hull part with one byouant component. The buoyant hull is exported as a single part with a single buoyant component (Non-buoyant volumes are included in this part as components with negative effectiveness). It is possible that this might cause problems for some models where the section through the hull at a certain location contains more than one closed contour. In subsequent versions of Hydromax we will add the capability to divide the main buoyant hull into different components.

Hydromax v8.0 file Also allows users to export Hydromax files that are compatible with earlier versions of Hydromax. Export Bitmap Allows you to export the rendered image as a bitmap file at the specified resolution. This command is only available when the Perspective window is frontmost with rendering turned on. Import Main Criteria

Imports criteria from the selected criteria files. Current criteria may be kept or discarded.

Page 188


Save Main Criteria As

Exports the current criteria set to the specified file. It is good practice to save the criteria library with each project in a project folder. Note that a branch of the criteria tree may be saved in its own file by right-clicking on the branch folder in the Criteria dialog tree. The whole library may be saved by right clicking on the root “Criteria” branch; this is not normally necessary as this is done after any major changes to the criteria definition. Import Prob Damage Criteria

As for main criteria but applies to the probabilistic damage criteria. Save Prob Damage Criteria As

As for main criteria but applies to the probabilistic damage criteria. Rest Prob Damage Criteria to defaults

Results the probabilistic damage criteria to their default values. Load Densities

Loads density table data previously saved from Hydromax – can be useful for synchronising the densities on several computers. Save Densities As

Saves the Fluid densities table data, see Density of Fluids on page 140. Page Setup

The Page Setup dialog allows you to change page size and orientation for printing. Print

The Print command allows you to print the contents of the frontmost window on the screen. Exit

Exit will close Hydromax and all the data windows. If you have any data or results, which have not been saved to disk, Hydromax will ask you if you wish to save them before quitting. Edit Menu

The Edit menu contains commands for working with tables. Undo

Undo may be used with desk accessories, but cannot be used on Hydromax drawing windows or data windows. Cut

Cut may be used in the Report window but cannot be used on Hydromax drawing or data windows. Copy

The Copy command allows you to copy data from any of the windows, including the design view, input tables, results tables and graph window.

Page 189


Paste

Choose the Paste command to Paste data into the Loadcase window or other input tables, or the Report window. Paste cannot be used in the View, Graph or Results windows. Select All

Selects the entire Report. Fill Down

Copies text in a table down a column like a spreadsheet. Table

Performs operations on Hydromax's Report window. Insert New Table Create a new table in the Report. Insert Row Insert a new row into the current table in the Report. Split Cell Split the currently selected cell into two separate cells in a table in the Report. Merge Cells Merge the selected cells in a table into a single cell in the Report. Delete Cells Delete current cell, column or row or a range of cells, columns or rows in the Report. Row Positioning Set Justification for the current table row or an entire table in the Report. Cell Border Set Cell Border Width for a single cell or range of cells in the Report. Cell Shading Set Cell Shading Percentage for a single cell or a range of cells in the Report. Show Grid Toggle table grid lines in the Report. Add

The Add command is used to add an entry to the input tables (Load, tank, margin line point etc.). Delete

The Delete command will delete rows from the input tables. If no rows are selected, the last row in the window will be deleted, otherwise all selected rows will be deleted. Sort Items

Sorts the selected rows in the Loadcase window

Page 190


Move Items Up

Moves the selected rows up (if possible) in the Loadcase and Compartment definition tables. Move Items Down

Moves the selected rows down (if possible) in the Loadcase and Compartment definition tables. Add Surface Areas

This command automatically adds the surface areas and centres of gravity of all hull surfaces into the current loading condition. This is useful for estimating the initial weight of hull plating. Activate / Deactivate GHS Export

This command activates the GHS Import command in the File menu if a Hydrolink License is available. It can also be used to release the Hydrolink license – a restart of Hydromax will be required for this to take effect. Preferences

The Hydromax preferences dialog allows you to set your analysis tolerances (or: error values) and select the option to stream the report to a Microsoft Word document. Also see: Tolerances on page 135 Streaming results to Word on page 145. View Menu

The View menu contains commands for controlling the views in the graphics windows. Zoom

The Zoom function allows you to examine the contents of the design view windows in detail by enlarging the selected area to fill the screen. Shrink

Choosing Shrink will reduce the size of the displayed image in the design view windows by a factor of two. Pan

Choosing Pan allows you to move the image around within the View window. Home View

Choosing Home View will set the image back to its Home View size. Rotate

Activates the Rotate command, which is a virtual trackball which lets you freely rotate a design in the Perspective view window. Set Home View

Choosing Set Home View allows you to set the Home View in the View window. To set the Home View, use Zoom, Shrink, and Pan to arrange the view, then select Set Home View from the View menu.

Page 191


Colours and lines

The Colours and lines function allows you to set the colour and thickness of the lines, labels, and graphs. Remember to always be careful when using colour. It is very easy to get carried away with bright colours and end up with a garish display that is uncomfortable to work with. In general it is best to use a neutral background such as mid grey or dull blue and use lighter or darker shades of a colour rather than fully saturated hues. From the scrollable list, select the item whose colour you wish to change. The item‟s current colour will be displayed on the left of the dialog. To change the colour click in the box and select a new colour from the palette. To Change the thickness select the thickness from the drop down list. When Loadcase window is frontmost, Colours for the loadcase items can be set. See Loadcase Colour Formatting on page 41. Font

Font command allows you to set the size and style of text.

The text style chosen will affect the display and printing of all text in the Report, Loadcase, Graph, Curve of Areas, and Results windows. Toolbar

Allows you to turn the Toolbars on and off. Status Bar

Allows you to turn the Status Bar on and off at the bottom of the screen. Assembly

Show or hide the assembly tree view. Properties

Displays the properties sheet, which may be used to view parameters of selected objects (such as tanks).

Page 192


Full Screen

Maximises screen usage. Case Menu

Commands associated with the Loadcases and Damage cases Edit Loadcase

Edit the properties of the current Loadcase (name and whether it is a loadcase or Loadgroup). Loadcases are created, opened and closed through the file menu. See Working with Loadcases on page 35. Add Damage case

Add another damage case Delete Damage case

Delete the selected damage cases Edit Damage case

Edit the properties of the selected damage case Extent of Damage

Automatically finds the breached tanks and compartments due to a cuboid extent of damage (or in the case of Probabilisitic damage, the zone or sub-zone). Create cases from Zone Damage

Automatically creates damage cases based on the zones that have been defined for Probabilistic damage analysis. (This is only required if you want to manually recreate some or all of the Proabilistic damage analysis conditions; when running Probabilistic damage analysis, temporary damage conditionas are created automatically.) Max. number of Loadcases

Specify the number of loadcase tabs – this requires a restart to activate the changes made. Analysis Menu

The Analysis menu can be used to change the current analysis mode. It also contains commands to set the input data and analysis settings and environment options required for the current analysis.

Page 193


Note: It is good practice when preparing to run analysis to work down the Analysis menu starting at the top and checking all of the settings and environment options. Heel

Selecting Heel allows you to specify the three ranges of heel angles that you wish Hydromax to step through. Separate ranges are used for Large Angle Stability, KN and Limiting KG analyses. Trim

Allows the specification of the trimming mode to be used for the analysis. This can be fixed trim; free-to-trim to loadcase; free-to-trim specifying initial trim value and free-totrim specifying LCG position. Draft

The range of drafts used for the analysis of upright hydrostatics can be set using this command. KG for the upright hydrostatics is also specified in this dialog. Displacement

The range of displacements used for the analysis of KN values, Limiting KG and Floodable Length can be set using this command. The vertical centre of gravity to be used for KN and Floodable Length analyses is specified here. Specified Condition

Allows you to specify Heel, Trim, CG, Displacement and Draft for the Specified Condition analysis. Permeability

The range of permeabilities used for the Floodable Length analysis are set using this command. Fluids

Allows you to specify whether to use Corrected VCG method or Simulate Fluid Movement method when treating the fluid contained in slack tanks. See Fluids Analysis Methods on page 137. Density

This command allows you to set the density of fluids used in the analysis. See Density on page 140. Waveform

The Waveform command allows you to perform analysis for a flat waterplane or sinusoidal or trochoidal waveforms. Criteria

The criteria menu item will bring up the criteria dialog. This allows you to specify which criteria will be checked during the analysis. See Criteria on page 153. When the floodable length analysis is selected, the criteria command will bring up a Floodable Length Criteria dialog with criteria that only apply to floodable length analysis. Page 194


Grounding

Specifies grounding on one or two points of variable length for use with the Equilibrium and Longitudinal Strength analyses. Update Loadcase

Checks for changed tanks and makes sure that any tanks and compartments that have not been formed are correctly calculated. It then updates the loadcase with the correct capacities and free surface moments for the tanks. Also recalculates totals and subsubtotals after a row sorting or moving command. Also see: Tank Loads on page 43 Recalculate Tanks and Compartments

Forces all tanks and compartments to be re-formed from their initial definition. This command also updates the loadcase. If any of the tank boundaries are made up from boundary surfaces, it is better to use “Recalculate Hull Sections” after re-opening the Maxsurf model to make sure the latest internal structure surfaces are being used as well. Recalculate Hull Sections

Deletes all existing hull, tank and compartment sections and recalculates them from the hull surface data and compartment definition. This is particularly useful if the underlying Maxsurf model has been modified, if you wish to recalculate at a different precision, or if you wish to modify whether skin thickness or trimming options are applied. Note: To be able to update the Hydromax model to changes made in Maxsurf see Updating the Hydromax Model on page 25 for a step-by-step procedure you can follow. Snap Margin Line to Hull

Project all of the margin line points horizontally onto the hull surface, ensuring that the margin line follows the hull shape precisely. Also see: Margin Line Points on page 73. Set Analysis Type

Choose the analysis type you wish to use from the sub-menu. Start Analysis

Selecting Start Analysis causes Hydromax to start performing the specified analysis. The analysis may be halted at any time by choosing Stop Analysis from this menu, also. Resume Analysis

If you have halted analysis by choosing Stop Analysis, Resume Analysis may be used to restart the calculation from the point where it was interrupted.

Page 195


Stop Analysis

This command halts the analysis at the current iteration. Note that the analysis may not have been completed and in the case of large angle stability, equilibrium condition and KN values, any data displayed for the final iteration may be incorrect. Start Batch Analysis

Hydromax will run the selected analyses for all combinations of load and damage cases using the batch processing command. Results are written to a tab delimited text file as specified by the user at the start of the analysis. Spool to Report

Send the results of the analysis to the report upon completion. This should be turned on before commencing the analysis to ensure that results are added to the report when the analysis is completed. Display Menu

The Display menu contains commands for controlling the data, which are displayed in the graphics and other windows. Data Format

Data Format allows you to choose which data are tabulated and graphed (Upright Hydrostatics, Stability, Equilibrium and Specified Condition). A dialog box allows you to choose from a range of stability variables. See Setting the Data Format on page 175.

Hydrostatic results Data format dialog

Used to select display options for Criteria results:

Page 196


Criteria table Data format dialog

Used to select which columns are displayed in the Loadcase window:

Loadcase Data format dialog

When the Max. Safe heeling angle angles graph is shown as a result of a Large Angle Stability analysis the Data Format dialog may be used to customise the graph layout:

Page 197


Max safe heeling angle Data format dialog

May be used to customise the Floodable length graph:

Floodable length Data format dialog Set Vessel to DWL

Rotates the vessel back to upright and to DWL after an analysis has been completed (or Select View from Data used). This is required for automatic update of the Loadcase (note that if you do not rotate back to the DWL, the Loadcase will not update while editing – only when start another analysis). This is to ensure that tank data in the Loadacase are for the vessel in the upright condition, not for tanks with the vessel at the final heel and trim of the last analysis. Select View from Data

This function may be used to synchronise the display in the Design View window with one of the sets of data in Results window. The view may be set from any of the results from Upright Hydrostatics, Large Angle Stability or Equilibrium analyses. Simply highlight the column or row that corresponds to the condition you wish to view and select “Select View From Data”; the Design View will change to match the condition in the selected row or column in the Results window. Visibility

The visibility of tanks, compartments, labels, hull contours, and other items in the design view may be set by using this dialog. Prob damage zones

Toggle the visibility of the probabilistic damage zones.

Page 198


Individual Loadcase masses

Toggle the visibility of the individual mass items in the current loadcase. Grid

The grid submenu allows you to hide the grid or show the grid with or without station grid labels. The grid can only be displayed when the vessel is in upright position on its design waterline. The option to display the grid will be greyed out when the ship is currently displayed in, for example, a trimmed state at the end of an equilibrium analysis. Switching analysis type puts the boat back into upright position on its design waterline. Show Single Hull Section in Body Plan

Selecting the Show Single Hull Section item from the Display menu will change the display in the Body Plan window to show only one section through the hull, as well as a control box, similar to the one in Maxsurf, in the top right corner of the window. The section being displayed can be chosen by clicking on the section indicators at the top of the control box. Alternatively, the section chosen can be changed by pressing the left or right cursor keys on your keyboard. This allows you to rapidly step through the hull sections from bow to stern. Also see: Show Single Hull Section on page 29 Render

When the Perspective window is the current view for the model the Render option may be toggled on and off to render the surfaces. Render Transparent

When the Perspective window is the current view for the model the Render Transparent option may be toggled on and off. Render Transparent makes the hull surfaces of the model semi transparent so that the rendered tanks and compartments within the model may be viewed. Animate

This command is available for any analysis that steps through several steps. For example, when a waveform has been specified and an equilibrium analysis is selected or after a Large Angle Stability analysis over a heeling range. Selecting Animate will animate the stability sequence in the design View window, through the range of heel angles specified. You may set the initial viewing position in the Perspective View window using the Pitch, Roll and Yaw indicators. When Hydromax has finished calculating the frames the sequence may be replayed by moving the mouse from side to side. Clicking the mouse button will terminate the animation. If animation is chosen after an Equilibrium Analysis has been performed in waves, the animation will automatically cycle through the full range of wave phases, giving a simple visual simulation of the motion of the hull through the wave. Hold the shift key down while selecting the command to save the animation.

Page 199


Data Menu Units

The units used may be specified using the Units command. In addition to the length and mass units classes, units for speed (used in wind heeling and heeling due to high-speed turn etc. criteria) and the angular units to be used for areas under GZ curves, may also be set. The angular units for measuring heel and trim angles are always degrees. See Setting Units on page 34 for more information. Coefficients

Allows you to customise how you wish to calculate the coefficients as well as the display format for the LCB and LCF. See Customising Coefficients on page 33 for more information. Design Grid

Access to the Design Grid is intended for information only. You are not expected to change the Design Grid in Hydromax. Frame of Reference

Access to the Frame of Reference is intended for information only. You are not expected to change the Frame of Reference in Hydromax. If the position(s) of the Baseline and/or Perpendiculars need to be changed from those defined in the Maxsurf model, they may be changed using the Frame of Reference command. It is highly recommended that the correct frame of reference be set in Maxsurf prior to loading the design into Hydromax. This will ensure that a consistent frame of reference is used in all the programs. See: Setting the Frame of Reference on page 17. Window Menu

For the items in this menu, each represents a Hydromax window. Selecting the item brings the appropriate window to the front. Cascade

Displays all the Windows behind the active Windows. Tile Horizontal

Layout all visible windows across the screen. Tile Vertical

Layout all visible windows down the screen. Arrange Icons

Rearranges the icons of any iconised window so that they are collected together at the bottom of the Maxsurf program window. View Direction

Select the desired view direction from the sub-menu. The selected design window will then be brought to the front.

Page 200


Loadcase

Brings the Loadcase window to the front. The Loadcase window allows you to enter a series of component weights, together with their longitudinal and vertical distances from the zero point. These inputs are used to calculate the total Displacement and Centre of Gravity for Stability, KN and Equilibrium analysis. Input

Choose from the Input item to bring the desired Input window to the front and display the Compartment Definition, Key Points, Margin Line Points or Modulus table. Results

Choose from the Results item to bring the desired Results window to the front and display the desired table. Graph

Brings the selected Graph window to the front. The Graph window displays a number of different graphs, depending on which analysis mode is currently active. Help Menu

Provides access to Hydromax Help. Hydromax Help

Invokes Hydromax Help. Hydromax Automation Reference

Invokes the Automation Reference help system. Online Support

Provides access to a wide range of support resources available on the internet. Check for Updates

Provides access to our website with the most recent version listed. About Hydromax

Displays information about the current version of Hydromax you are using.

Page 201

Appendix A

Appendix A: Calculation of Form Parameters This Appendix explains how the calculation of form parameters (CB, CP, AM, etc.) is achieved in Hydromax, and investigates why differences with other hydrostatics packages may occur.

Definition and calculation of form parameters Below is a summary of the definitions of basic vessel particulars and form parameters used in Hydromax. Measurement Reference Frames

Results in Hydromax are given from the vessel‟s zero point. However, because Hydromax treats trim exactly (the hull is rotated not sheared when trim occurs), there are two frames of reference: Ship or upright frame of reference The “ship” or “upright” reference frame is that of the upright vessel with zero-trim. Here the baseline is horizontal and the perpendiculars are vertical. “Longitudinal” measurements are made parallel to the baseline and “vertical” measurements are perpendicular to the baseline. World or trimmed frame of reference The “world” or “trimmed” reference frame is that of the trimmed vessel. Here the baseline is no longer horizontal and neither are the perpendiculars vertical. “Longitudinal” measurements are made parallel to the horizontal, static waterline and “vertical” measurements are perpendicular to the waterline

Rotated reference frame (red) and measurements in the two reference frames: Measurements in the upright vessel reference frame (green) and trimmed reference frame (blue)

When the vessel is upright (zero trim and zero heel) these axis systems are parallel. However if the vessel is trimmed or heeled or rotated in both directions simultaneously, these axis systems are no longer parallel.

Page 202

Appendix A

Ship-Fixed and Earth-Fixed(world) axis systems

The majority of measurements are given in the “ship” frame of reference. These include longitudinal centres of gravity, floatation and buoyancy (LCG, LCF, LCB); and measurements from the keel such as KB and KG. Measurements such as BM, GM, that are explicitly vertical, are measured in the “world” frame of reference, i.e. GM is the true vertical separation of the metacentre and the centre of gravity with the vessel inclined and are always measured normal to the water surface. Thus the metacentre is always vertically (in the earth-fixed axis system) above the centre of buoyancy by a distance BM = I / vol where I is the second moment of area of the waterplane. It is for this reason that, in general, KM is not equal to KB+BM (BM is in a different axis system to KB and KM, and only if the vessel is upright are the axis systems parallel and hence the equation holds). Similarly, in generally for the vessel to be in equilibrium, LCG is not equal to LCB – if both LCB and LCG are measured in the ship-axis system (of course if they are measured in the earthfixed axis system then they are the same. This is because if the vessel is trimmed and if the VCG and VCB are not the same, then there will be a sin(trim angle) term introduced. The same is true of TCB and TCG if the vessel is heeled.

Page 203

Appendix A Nomenclature

Amax Ams A AWP BOA BWL B b GM

KB KG LOA LCB LCF LCG LWL LBP L T0 T t

Maximum immersed cross-sectional area to waterline under investigation Immersed cross-sectional area to waterline under investigation amidships Immersed cross-section area: Amax or Ams as selected by user Area of waterplane at the waterline under investigation Overall beam of whole vessel (above and below waterline) Maximum waterline beam at design waterline Maximum beam of waterline under investigation Waterline beam of station under investigation Metacentric height: vertical distance from centre of gravity to metacentre, measured in the trimmed reference frame Distance from keel (baseline) to centre of buoyancy, measured normal to the baseline. Distance from keel (baseline) to centre of gravity, measured normal to the baseline. Length overall Longitudinal Centre of Buoyancy, measured in upright reference frame, parallel to baseline. Longitudinal Centre of Floatation, measured in upright reference frame, parallel to baseline. Longitudinal Centre of Gravity, measured in upright reference frame, parallel to baseline. Length of design waterline Length between perpendiculars length of waterline under investigation Draft from some arbitrary baseline (normally the lowest point on the design) Maximum immersed depth (draft) of hull Draft (immersed depth) of station under investigation Immersed volume of displacement at waterline under investigation

Coefficient parameters

There are several options for calculating hullform coefficients. These can be modified in the Data | Coefficients dialog shown below:

Page 204

Appendix A

Length

The datum/design waterline or DWL is a waterline near which the fully loaded design is intended to float under normal circumstances. The forward perpendicular is normally defined as the intersection of the DWL with the bow. The after perpendicular is normally defined as the position of the rudder post, or possibly the transom. Several lengths may be defined: the LBP is the length between perpendiculars, this may be different from the length of the DWL (LWL) and in general, will also be different from the LOA (overall length). In some cases, particularly for resistance prediction purposes, it may be more appropriate to define an effective length of the underwater body, features such as bulbous bows and overhangs can make the LBP, LWL and LOA quite different. In addition, for calculations at drafts other than the DWL, it may be appropriate to use the actual waterline length at that draft (L).

Some of the more common lengths that may be used to characterise a vessel.

In Hydromax you may choose between the length between perpendiculars and the waterline length for the calculation of Block, Prismatic and Waterplane Area Coefficients. Select Coefficients from the Display menu:

Page 205

Appendix A

Beam

It is normal to use the maximum waterline beam for calculation of coefficients, and this may be of the DWL or the waterline under consideration. However, there may be times when it is appropriate to use the maximum immersed beam (e.g. submarine, vessel with tumble-home or blisters). For the calculation of section area coefficients it is normal practice to use the beam and draft of the section in question.

Vessel with tumble-home

Catamarans and other multihull vessels pose another difficulty. In some cases the overall beam is of importance, in others, the beam of the individual hulls may be required. Hydromax uses the total waterline beam of immersed portions of the section for calculation of block coefficient and other form parameters. For the case of a monohull this will be the normal waterline beam. For catamarans this will be twice the demihull beam (remember that the total displaced volume is used and hence the block coefficient is the same as that of a single demihull). For the section shown below, the beam used would be the sum of B1, B2 and B3.

Multihull beams

You may choose which beam should be used from the following list:

In the reported hydrostatics, you can select various beams: Page 206

Appendix A

Calculated beams

The values “Beam extents” are those that measure the beam across the maximum port and starboard extents of the vessel. For a catamaran this would be from the outside of the port demihull to the outside of the starboard demihull. For a monhull, this would simply be the distance from the port side to the starboard side. The other beam values are calculated by summing the breadth of waterline crossings as described above. For a monhull without tunnels, this will be the same as the extents value, but for a multihull, it will be less than the extents value. Hydromax uses these values for computing coefficients. Draft

The draft is normally specified from a nominal datum. Normally this datum is the lowest part of the upright hull. However, for vessels with raked keel lines or yachts, the datum may be elsewhere. In Hydromax drafts are defined from the datum line. However, there are also occasions when the immersed depth of the section is a more relevant measure of draft, this is often the case when form parameters are calculated. Hydromax uses the depths that stations extend below the waterline for calculation of form coefficients. Both depths are measured in upright position. You may select which depth should be used for the calculation of form parameters, including the option of measuring the draft to the baseline – this gives the option of ignoring appendages such as fin keels when determining the draft to be used to calculate the form parameter (if the baseline is defined to the bottom of the canoe body for example). It should be noted that the section area will, however, include the appendages.:

Page 207

Appendix A Draft measurements

Draft measurement at heel angle When the vessel is heeled, the draft is measured through the intersection of the upright waterline and the centreline, perpendicular to the heeled waterline (see figure below). Essentially the draft is measured along the heeled and trimmed perpendiculars on the centreline. It is for this reason that as the heel approaches 90degrees, the draft becomes very large.

Draft measured along the inclined perpendicular lines

Immersed depth and Draft measurements The images below show the difference between the draft measurements (which are made in the inclined centreline plane of the vessel) and the immersed depth measurements (which are made normal to the free-surface).

Difference between “Immersed depth” and “Draft” measurements

Midship and Max Area Sections

It is current usual practice to define the midship section as midway between the perpendiculars, however for some vessels it is defined as the midpoint of the DWL. For vessels with no parallel mid-body, the section with greatest cross-sectional area may also be of particular interest. In Hydromax, the position midway between the perpendiculars is defined as midships.

Page 208

Appendix A

When computing form coefficients, such as CP and CM, you may select which section area should be used: Hydromax uses the station with the maximum immersed cross-sectional area at the waterline under consideration.

Block Coefficient

Principles of Naval Architecture defines the block coefficient as: "the ratio of the volume of displacement of the moulded form up to any waterline to the volume of a rectangular prism with length, breadth and depth equal to the length, breadth and mean draft of the ship at that waterline." However, the actual definitions of the length, beam and draft used vary between authorities. Length may be LBP, LWL or some effective length. The beam may be at amidships or the maximum moulded beam of the waterline; or may be defined according to another standard – this may be important for hulls with significant tumble-home or blisters below the waterline. Hydromax uses the length beam and draft as selected in the Coefficients dialog to compute the block coefficient. The beam used is that obtained by summing the immersed waterline crossings of the specified section.

CB

L B T

Section Area Coefficient

Principles of Naval Architecture defines the midship coefficient as: "The ratio of the immersed area of the midship station to that of a rectangle of breadth equal to moulded breadth and depth equal to moulded draft at amidships." It should be noted that, for sections that have significant tumble-home or blisters below the waterline, the midship section coefficient can be greater than unity. In Hydromax midships is midway between the perpendiculars. The section area coefficient used by Hydromax, is calculated at either the station with maximum cross-sectional area or the midship section area (as defined in the Coefficients dialog). The beam and immersed depth of the selected section is used unless the draft to baseline option has been selected in which case this draft is used.

Options for Section area coefficient

CM

A b t

Prismatic Coefficient

Principles of Naval Architecture defines the prismatic coefficient as:

Page 209

Appendix A

"The ratio between the volume of displacement and a prism whose length equals the length of the ship and whose cross-section equals the midship section area." Again the definition of midship section and vessel length depend on the standard being used. Hydromax uses the selected length and the selected immersed cross-section area Amax or Ams.

CP

L A

Waterplane Area Coefficient

Principles of Naval Architecture defines the waterplane area coefficient as: "The ratio between the area of the waterplane and the area of a circumscribing rectangle." Hydromax uses the length and beam as selected.

CWP

AWP L B

LCG and LCB

Hydromax allows you to fully customise how you want to display the LCB and LCF values. See Customising Coefficients on page 33 for more information. The LCG and LCB are calculated in the “ship” or “upright” frame of reference; see Measurement Reference Frames on page 202. When the vessel is free-to-trim, the LCG and LCB will be at the same longitudinal position in the global coordinate system, but not in the frame of reference. Therefore a difference between the LCG and the LCB value will occur when the vessel is trimmed. This is explained in the figure below:

Effect of vertical separation of CG and CB on LCG and LCB measured in the Ship reference frame

Page 210

Appendix A

Note: LCG and LCB are calculated in the vessels‟ frame of reference and therefore will have different longitudinal positions when the vessel is trimmed then for when it is upright. This is the same for differences in TCG and TCB values due to heeling. Trim angle

The trim angle as defined by:

tan

1

Ta

Tf L pp

where: is the trim angle; Ta , Tf are the aft and forward drafts at the corresponding perpendiculars and LPP is the length between perpendiculars. Maximum deck inclination

The inclination angle is a combination of heel and trim angle. Hydromax calculates the steepest slope of the deck when the ship is trimmed and/or heeled. Deck camber and initial deck slope are not taken into account. For example:

The Max deck inclination is the maximum slope of the deck when combining the trim and heel angle of the vessel, assuming the deck inclination is zero when the vessel is in upright position.

Immersion

The weight required to sink the model one unit-length below its current waterline. The unitlength can be either in cm or inch depending on your unit settings. MTc or MTi

The required moment to make the vessel trim one unit-length. That can be either cm or inch depending on your unit settings.

Page 211

Appendix A RM at 1 deg

The righting Moment at 1 degree heel angle, calculated by

RM

Displ *GMt * sin(1)

Potential for errors in hydrostatic calculations There are a number of potential sources of error when calculating the hydrostatic properties of immersed shapes. These mainly occur from the integration method used, and occur in both hand calculations, and most automatic calculations carried out by computers. Both methods use numerical integration techniques, which are normally either based on Simpson's rule or the Trapezium rule. As with all numerical integration schemes, the accuracy increases as the step size is reduced, hence computer calculations offer an enormous advantage compared with hand calculations, due to the increased speed and accuracy with which these calculations may be carried out. With hand calculations, it is normal to use perhaps 21 sections and perhaps 3-5 significant figures; with computer calculations, it is quite feasible to use 200 sections or more with 10s of significant figures. These effects are noted from comparing the results of different hydrostatics packages on the same hullform. In general, differences for basic parameters such as displacement etc. are under 0.5% (note that, in general, agreement of hand calculations to within 2% is considered good). Differences in derived form parameters may show considerable variation. However, this is primarily due to differences in the definitions used – see discussion above. The 0.5% error discrepancy noted above, may be attributed to a number of causes: Convergence limits when balancing a hull to a specified displacement or centre of gravity. Different number of integration stations used, and their distribution. Where there are large changes in shape, such as near the bow and stern, the stations should be more closely spaced. This can be of particular importance if the waterline intersects the stem profile between two sections. Differences in the hull definition, and number of interpolation points used to define each section. If the surface is exported as DXF poly-lines then the precision used and the number of straight-line sections used to make up the poly-line are important. The integration method used: trapezium, Simpson, or higher order methods.

Integration of wetted surface area

At first glance, it may seem that wetted surface area may be calculated by simply integrating the station girth along the length of the hull, in a similar way that one might integrate the station cross-sectional area along the length of the hull to obtain the volume. However, this is not the case, and the wetted surface area can only be accurately found by summing elemental areas over the complete surface. Further, the error due to integrating girths along the vessel length cannot be removed simply by increasing the number of integration stations. The only accurate numerical method is to sum the areas of individual triangles interpolated on the parametric surface. The differences are easily shown by considering the surface area of half a sphere. This is given analytically by: A 2 R 2 , where R is the radius of the circle. It may be shown that the area obtained by integrating the girth of the sphere along its length is given by: 2

R2 , note that this is with an infinite number of integration steps, and hence the 2 2 R2 4/ 1.27 , or integration of section girths underestimates by error factor of 0.5 2 R 2 A'

approximately 27%. Page 212

Appendix A

However, for normal ship hulls the differences will be much less, due to the greatly reduced longitudinal curvature. Surface areas calculated by the 'Calculate Areas' dialog in Maxsurf are the most accurate, since they are derived from the actual parametric definition of the surface. Those calculated by Hydromax and most other hydrodynamics packages, which use a number of vertical stations to define the hull, will be subject to the error described above.

Reference Designs A folder of reference hull shapes is included with Maxsurf and Hydromax. These designs are of simple geometric shapes and can be used to validate calculations performed by Hydromax. Below is a table of results derived analytically from these shapes compared with results obtained from Maxsurf and Hydromax at different precisions.

Page 213

Appendix A

Reference Calculations Hydrostatics calculations for various reference designs, comparison of Maxsurf and Hydromax with analytical values sphere 10m diam at 5m draft

Analytically derived

Volume m^3 261.79939

WP Area m^2 78.53982

VCB LCB m m -1.875 0

Hydromax High Precision

260.4998

78.381

-1.874 0

Hydromax Low Precision

260.34279

78.357

-1.874 0

Maxsurf Hi Precision

261.532

78.341

-1.875 0

Maxsurf Low Precision

257.105

77.849

-1.871 0

10m Cylinder 10m diam. at 5m draft Volume m^3 Analytically derived 392.699

WP Area m^2 100

VCB LCB m m -2.122 0

Hydromax High Precision Hydromax Low Precision Maxsurf Hi Precision Maxsurf Low Precision

100 100 100 100

-2.121 -2.121 -2.122 -2.118

Page 214

391.991 391.991 392.522 389.874

0 0 0 0

Trans. I m^4 Long. I m^4 Volume WP Area Trans. I 490.873852 490.87385 % error % error % error 488.6807269 489.14247 -0.50% -0.20% 0.45% 488.564741 488.93873 -0.56% -0.23% 0.47% 490.57 485.761 -0.10% -0.25% 0.06% 483.191 480.89 -1.79% -0.88% 1.57%

Long. I % error 0.35% 0.39% 1.04% 2.03%

Trans. I m^4 Long. I m^4 Volume WP Area Trans. I 833.333333 833.33333 % error % error % error 833.333333 833.33333 -0.18% 0.00% 0.00% 833.333333 833.33333 -0.18% 0.00% 0.00% 833.333 833.333 -0.05% 0.00% 0.00% 833.333 833.333 -0.72% 0.00% 0.00%

Long. I % error 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0.00%

Appendix A

Box 20m long 10m beam at 5m draft Volume m^3 Analytically derived 1000

WP Area m^2 200

VCB m -2.5

LCB m 0

Hydromax High Precision Hydromax Low Precision Maxsurf Hi Precision Maxsurf Low Precision

200 200 200 200

-2.5 -2.5 -2.5 -2.5

0 0 0 0

1000 1000 1000 1000

Parabolic Wigley type Hull, LWL=15m,B=1.5m,D=0.9375 Volume WP Area VCB LCB m^3 m^2 m m Analytically derived 9.375 15 -0.352 0 Hydromax High Precision

9.364

14.985

-0.352 0

Hydromax Low Precision

9.351

14.98

-0.352 0

Maxsurf Hi Precision

9.372

14.999

-0.351 0

Maxsurf Low Precision

9.302

14.942

-0.351 0

Trans. I m^4 Long. I m^4 Volume WP Area Trans. I 1666.666666 6666.6667 % error % error % error 1666.666666 6666.6667 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 1666.666666 6666.6667 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 1666.667 6666.667 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 1666.667 6666.667 0.00% 0.00% 0.00%

Long. I % error 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0.00%

Trans. I m^4 Long. I m^4 Volume WP Area Trans. I 1.92875 168.75 % error % error % error 1.92527 168.4685 -0.12% -0.10% 0.18% 1.92418 168.3773 -0.26% -0.13% 0.24% 1.927 168.63 -0.03% -0.01% 0.09% 1.91 167.621 -0.78% -0.39% 0.97%

Long. I % error 0.17% 0.22% 0.07% 0.67%

Page 215

Appendix B

Appendix B: Criteria file format The criteria are saved in a Hydromax criteria file with the extension .hcr. The file is a normal PC text file, which may be edited manually so as to generate custom criteria. The typical format of the file is given below: Please refer to the file C:\Program Files\Maxsurf\HMCriteriaHelp\CriteriaHelp.html for a full list of all the parameters for all the different criteria types. Hydromax Criteria File [units] LengthUnits = m MassUnits = tonne SpeedUnits = kts AngleUnits = deg GZAreaGMAngleUnits = deg [end] [criterionGroup] GroupName = Specific Criteria ParentGroupName = root [end] [criterionGroup] GroupName = My Custom Criteria ParentGroupName = root [end] [criterionGroup] GroupName = STIX input data ParentGroupName = Specific Criteria [end] [criterion] Type RuleName CritName CritInfo CritInfoFile Locked GroupName TestIntact TestDamage Test Compare UseLoHeel UseEquilibrium UseHiHeel UseFirstPeak UseMaxGZ UseFirstDF UseVanishingStab LoHeel HiHeel RequiredValue [end]

Page 216

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

CTStdAreaUnderGZBetweenLimits STIX input data GZ area to the lesser of downflooding or… Area under GZ curve between specified heel… HMCriteriaHelp\StixHelp.rtf true STIX input data true false false GreaterThan false true false false false true true 0.0 30.0 0.000

Appendix B

[criterion] Type RuleName CritName CritInfo CritInfoFile Locked GroupName TestIntact TestDamage Test Compare RequiredValue [end]

= = = = = = = = = = = =

CTStdAngleOfVanishingStab STIX input data Angle of vanishing stability Calculates the angle of vanishing stability… HMCriteriaHelp\StixHelp.rtf true STIX input data true false false GreaterThan 0.0

The file must have “Hydromax Criteria File” in the first row. The first section of the file is the units section and this specifies the units that are to be used in the file. There are two angular units: AngleUnits Specifies the units for angular measurements, e.g. range of stability GZAreaGMAngleUnits Specifies the angle units used for area under GZ graph and for GM. The criteria then appear after the units section and as many criteria as required may be included. The common parameters for all criteria are as follows: Type Describes the type of criterion RuleName Text which specifies the rule to which the criterion belongs CritName Text which specifies the criterion‟s name CritInfo Verbose description of the criterion Locked Whether the criterion may be edited in Hydromax or not. If Locked is set to true, it is not possible to edit the criterion‟s parameters in Hydromax The other parameters that may be set depend on the criterion type.

Page 217

Appendix C

Appendix C: Criteria Help In this Appendix all individual Parent Criteria are explained in detail. This information can also be found in the lower right of the Criteria Dialog in the Criteria Help section. In this section: Parent Heeling Arms Parent Heeling Moments Parent Stability Criteria

For all general help on criteria or working with the criteria dialog, see Chapter 4 Stability Criteria on page 153.

Parent calculations Special calculations are provided for some criteria parameters. This allows for complex calculations to be cross referenced into criteria. Currently this has only been implemented for the IMO roll-back angle calculation used in the IMO code on Intact Stability, severe wind and rolling (weather) criterion. If there are any other calculations that you would like implemented, please contact [email protected] with details of the required calculations. The new parent calculations are listed above the parent heeling arms:

Parent calculations in Hydromax Criteria dialog

As with other criteria and heeling arms, you should make a copy of the parent calculation by dragging it to your custom criteria folder. Selecting a calculation in a criterion

Using a calculation in a criterion is very similar to using a heel arm: Define your custom calculation by copying it from the parent list. In the criterion select the required calculation from the pull down list:

Angle calculators

These calculators produce an angular measurement and may be referenced by the following criteria: Criteria that currently support roll-back angle calculations

Heeling arm criteria (xRef) Combined heeling arm criteria (xRef) Heeling arm criteria (stand alone) Heeling arm, Page 218

Ratio of areas type 2

XRefHeelRatioOfAreas2

Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 2)

XRefHeelGenericWindHeeling

Ratio of areas type 2 - general wind heeling arm

CritHeelRatioOfAreas2

Combined criteria (ratio of areas

CritHeelGenericWindHeeling

Appendix C

combined criteria (stand alone) Heeling arm, combined criteria (stand alone)

type 2) - general wind heeling arm

Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 2) - wind heeling arm

CritHeelWindHeeling

IMO roll-back angle calculator

The IMO roll back angle calculator calculates the roll back angle as per the severe wind and rolling (weather) criterion as defined in the IMO Code on Intact Stability. The input parameters may be specified by the user or calculated by Hydromax for the vessel in the upright condition for the current loadcase. The block coefficient is calculated with the current user settings for length and beam (not necessarily the waterline beam which another parameter required for the calculation). The method used for the k-factor can be one of three options: “Round bilge: k = 1.0”, “Sharp bilge: k = 0.7” or “Tabulated value for k” – these are auto completed so you only need to type the first letter.

Input parameters for IMO roll-back angle calculation

Parent Heeling Arms As with the criteria, there is a list of parent heeling arms, from which custom heeling arms may be derived:

Available heeling arms and moments

Page 219

Appendix C

To learn how to cross reference these heeling arms into criteria, please see Heeling arm criteria (xRef) on page 246. Heeling Arm Definition

This section describes how to define heeling arms and is valid for both the parent heeling arms that can be cross referenced into the heeling arm criteria, and for the Old heeling arm criteria where the heeling arm is specified for each criterion separately. There are several heeling arms that are used for the criteria. They are defined below. General heeling arm General heeling arm with gust General cos+sin heeling arm User Defined Heeling Arm Wind Turning Lifting heeling Towing heeling Forces heeling arm Trawling heeling arm Areas and levers Important note: heeling arm criteria dependent on displacement

Note: When you are working with the parent heeling arms, make sure you copy them into a custom heeling arms folder before editing them. Same as for the Parent criteria, the Parent heeling arms will be reset to their default values each time you start up Hydromax. General heeling arm

The general form of the heeling arm is given below:

H( )

A cos n ( )

where: is the heel angle, A is the magnitude of the heeling arm,

cosn describes the shape of the curve. Typically n=1 is used for passenger crowding and vessel turning since the horizontal lever for the passenger transverse location reduces with the cosine of the heel angle. For wind n=2 is often used for heeling because both the projected area as well as the lever decrease with the cosine of the heel angle. However, some criteria, such as IMO Severe wind and rolling (weather criterion) have a heeling arm of constant magnitude, in this case n=0 should be used. Make sure you read Important note: heeling arm criteria dependent on displacement on page 226. General heeling arm with gust

Some criteria require a Gust Ratio, this is the ratio of the magnitude of the wind heeling arm during a gust to the magnitude of the wind heeling arm under steady wind.

Page 220

Appendix C

GustRatio

H gust H steady

Both the steady and the gust heel arm have the same shape.

H steady ( )

H gust ( )

A cosn ( )

A GustRatio cosn ( )

where: is the heel angle,

A is the magnitude of the heeling arm, cosn describes the shape of the curve. It should be noted, that in this case, the definition of gust ratio is the ratio of the heeling arms. Some criteria specify the ratio of the wind speeds; if it is assumed that the wind pressure is proportional to the square of the wind seed, the ratio of the heel arms will be the square of the ratio of the wind speeds. General cos+sin heeling arm

Some criteria, notably lifting of weights, require a heeling arm with both a sine and cosine component:

H( )

k A cos n ( )

B sin m ( )

It should be noted that provided the indices are both unity, the same heeling arm form may be used for computing towing heeling arms of the form:

H( )

k A cos(

) B sin(

)

in this case a constant angle (in the case of towing, the angle of the tow above the horizontal) is included. It may be shown that this is equivalent to:

H( )

k C cos( ) D sin( )

where:

C

R2 1 tan 2 (

), D

C tan(

), R

2

A

2

2

B and

tan

B A

Make sure you read Important note: heeling arm criteria dependent on displacement on page 226. User Defined Heeling Arm

A user-defined heeling arm may be used in the criteria. With the heeling arm, the user can specify the number of points and the shape of the heeling arm curve. This heeling arm can then be cross-referenced into any of the heeling arm criteria. First, the number of points is specified and then for each point the angle and magnitude of the curve can be specified. These should be comma delimited for example <45 , 1.2> for a heeling arm magnitude of 1.2 meters at 45 degrees angle of heel. (To aid input of the data, if only one value is supplied it is taken as the heel angle – and the magnitude is left unchanged, and if a value preceded by a comma is given, this is taken as the magnitude – and the heel angle is left unchanged.) A single coefficient may be adjusted and this is used as a multiplication factor (whist the shape of the curve remains unchanged).

Page 221

Appendix C

Passenger crowding heeling arm

The magnitude of the heel arm is given by:

H pc ( )

n pas MD

cos n ( )

where:

n pas is the number of passengers M is the average mass of a single passenger D is the average distance of passengers from the vessel centreline is the vessel mass (same units as M ) The heeling arm parameters are specified as follows: Option number of passengers: nPass

Description Number of passengers

Units none

passenger mass: M distance from centreline: D cosine power: n

Average mass of one passenger Average distance of the passengers from the centreline Cosine power for curve - defines shape

mass length none

Wind heeling arm

In the case of the wind pressure based formulation, the wind heeling arm is given by:

Hw( )

a

PA h H cosn ( ) g

where: a is a constant, theoretically unity A is the windage area at height h is the vessel mass P is the wind pressure H is the vertical centre of hydrodynamic resistance to the wind force In the case of the wind velocity based formulation, the wind heeling arm is given by: Page 222

Appendix C

Hw( )

a

v2 A h H cosn ( ) g

where: a is now effectively an average drag coefficient for the windage area multiplied by the air density and has units of density v is the wind speed. And the other parameters are described as above. Option constant: a

Description Constant which may be used to modify the magnitude of the heel arm, normally unity for pressure based formulation or 0.5 ρair CD for the velocity formulation; where ρair is the density of air and CD is an average drag coefficient for the windage area

wind model

Pressure or Velocity (type “P” or “V”)

wind pressure or velocity

Actual velocity of pressure - depends on wind model

area centroid height: h

Height of user defined total or additional windage area User may specify either a total windage area Or, an area to be added to the windage area computed by Hydromax based on the hull sections There are four options for specifying H (all options are calculated with the vessel upright at the loadcase displacement and LCG): User specified H is taken as half the mean draft. H is taken as the vertical centre of underwater lateral projected area.

total area: A additional area: A

height of lateral resistance: H

H = mean draft / 2 H = vert. centre of projected lat. u'water area H = waterline cosine power: n

H is taken as the waterline Cosine power for curve - defines shape

Units none for pressure based formulation; mass/length3 for velocity based formulation

mass/(time2 length) or length/ time length length2 length2

length

length length

length none

Turning heeling arm

The magnitude of the heel arm is derived from the moment created by the centripetal force acting on the vessel during a high-speed turn and the vertical separation of the centres of gravity and hydrodynamic lateral resistance to the turn. The heeling arm is obtained by dividing the heeling moment by the vessel weight. The heeling arm is thus given by:

Ht ( )

a

v2 h cos n ( ) Rg

where (in consistent units): a is a constant, theoretically unity Page 223

Appendix C

v is the vessel velocity R is the radius of the turn h is the vertical separation of the centres of gravity and lateral resistance The heeling arm parameters are specified as follows: Option constant: a vessel speed: v turn radius: R turn radius, R, as percentage of LWL Vertical lever: h

h = KG h = KG - mean draft / 2 h = KG - vert. centre of projected lat. u'water area cosine power: n

Description Constant which may be used to modify the magnitude of the heel arm, normally unity Vessel speed in turn Turn radius may be specified directly Or, as some criteria require, as percentage of LWL There are four options for specifying h (all options are calculated with the vessel upright at the loadcase displacement and LCG): User specified h is taken as KG - position of G above baseline in upright condition h is taken as KG less half the mean draft. h is taken as the vertical separation of the centres of gravity and underwater lateral projected area. Cosine power for curve - defines shape

Units none length/time length % length

length length length

none

Lifting heeling arm

This is used to simulate the effect of lifting a weight from its stowage position. The magnitude of the heel arm is given by:

H lw ( )

M

h cos( ) v sin( )

where: M is the mass of the weight being lifted h is horizontal separation of the centre of gravity of the weight in its stowage position and the suspension position v is vertical separation of the centre of gravity of the weight in its stowage position and the suspension position is the vessel mass (same units as M ) The heeling arm parameters are specified as follows: Option Mass being lifted: M vertical separation of suspension from stowage position: v

horizontal separation of suspension from stowage position: h Page 224

Description Mass of weight being lifted Vertical separation of suspension point from weight‟s original stowage position on the vessel. This value is positive if the suspension position is above the original stowage position. Horizontal separation of suspension point from weight‟s original stowage position on the vessel This value is positive if the horizontal shift of the weight should

Units mass length

length

Appendix C

produce a positive heeling moment.

Towing heeling arm

The magnitude of the heel arm is given by:

H tow ( )

T v cosn ( g

) h sin(

)

where: T is the tension in the towline or vessel thrust, expressed as a force. h is horizontal offset of the tow attachment position from the vessel centreline v is vertical separation tow attachment position from the vessel‟s vertical centre of thrust is the vessel mass n is the power index for the cosine term which may be used to change the shape of the heeling arm curve is the (constant) angle of the towline above the horizontal. It is assumed that the towline is sufficiently long that this angle remains constant and does not vary as the vessel is heeled. The heeling arm parameters are specified as follows: Option tension or thrust: T vertical separation of propeller centre and tow attachment: v horizontal offset of tow attachment: h

angle of tow above horizontal: tau cosine power: n

Description Tension in towline or vessel thrust Vertical separation tow attachment position from the vessel‟s vertical centre of thrust. This value is positive if the towline is above the thrust centre. Horizontal offset of the tow attachment position from the vessel centreline. This value is positive if the offset is in the direction of the tow. Angle of tow above the horizontal

Units force length

Cosine power for curve - defines shape

none

length

angle

Forces heeling arm

This heeling arm can be used to model up to two forces acting on the vessel forces, such as those applied due fire-fighting or manoeuvring using thrusters. The magnitude of the heel arm is given by:

H forces ( )

1 A1 h1 g

H cosn1 ( )

A2 h 2

H cosn2 ( )

where: A1 and A2 are two forces acting on the vessel, expressed as a force, not a mass. h1 and h2 are the vertical heights (from the zero point) at which these forces act.

n1 and n2 define the shapes of the heeling arms created by the two forces. H is the assumed vertical position of the vessel‟s centre of lateral resistance (or the centre of rotation from which the forces are applied) is the vessel mass g is acceleration due to gravity

Page 225

Appendix C Trawling heeling arm

This heeling arm can be used model the effects of trawl net snagging as defined in Annex G of the Australian NSCV requirements :

H trawlsng ( )

m y cosn ( ) m

where: m is a mass parameter determined from the breaking load of the trawl gear and the downwards angle of the trawl net. y is the transverse distance of the line of action of the trawl wire from the vessel centreline n defines the shape of the heeling arm. is the vessel mass Areas and levers

Some criteria require the evaluation of above and below water lateral projected areas and their vertical centroids. The user may also specify additional areas and vertical centroids or the total areas and vertical centroids. In all cases the vertical centroids are given in the Maxsurf/Hydromax co-ordinate system; i.e.: from the model‟s vertical datum, positive upwards. The lateral projected area and its centroid of area are calculated for the upright vessel (zero heel) at the draft and trim defined in the loadcase or trim dialog. The area is calculated from the hydrostatic sections used by Hydromax; thus, increasing the number of sections will increase the accuracy of the area calculation; further, only “Hull” surfaces are included in the calculation - “Structure” surfaces are ignored. The vertical position of the keel, K, is assumed to be at the baseline (as set up in the Frame of Reference dialog), even if the baseline does not correspond to the physical bottom of the vessel. Important note: heeling arm criteria dependent on displacement

Some heeling arm criteria are dependent on the displacement of the vessel for the calculation of the Heeling Arm. For example, the value “A” in:

H( )

A cos n ( )

,is manually calculated from:

A

M

, where

M = heeling moment Δ = displacement. For these types of heeling arms you should use the various heeling moment curves that are available – see below:

Heeling moment curves

Parent Heeling Moments

Heeling moments work the same way as Parent Heeling Arms in that they can be cross referenced into criteria. The advantage of using heeling moments is that they provide a constant heeling moment (varying heeling arm) as the vessel displacement changes (due to different loadcases or during a limiting KG analysis). Page 226

Appendix C

These are in addition to the existing specific heeling arm curves for passenger crowding, wind heeling etc., which take account of the vessel displacement as required. The following heeling moments are available in the Hydromax criteria dialog: General heeling moment General cos+sin heeling moment General heeling moment with gust User Defined Heeling Moment General heeling moment

The general form of the heeling moment is given below. It allows you to specify a constant heeling moment as opposed to a constant heeling arm:

H( )

A

cosn ( )

where: is the heel angle, A is the magnitude of the heeling moment (mass.length) and (mass); thus

the vessel displacement

A is the magnitude of the heeling arm (length).

cosn describes the shape of the curve. Typically n=1 is used for passenger crowding and vessel turning since the horizontal lever for the passenger transverse location reduces with the cosine of the heel angle. For wind n=2 is often used for heeling because both the projected area as well as the lever decrease with the cosine of the heel angle. However, some criteria, such as IMO Severe wind and rolling (weather criterion) have a heeling arm of constant magnitude, in this case n=0 should be used. General cos+sin heeling moment

Some criteria, notably lifting of weights, require a heeling moment with both a sine and cosine component:

H( )

k

A cosn ( ) B sin m ( )

where: is the heel angle, A and B the magnitudes of the cosine and sine components of the heeling moment (mass.length) and

the vessel displacement (mass); thus

A and B are the magnitude of the

heeling arm (length). It should be noted that provided the n and m indices are both unity, the same heeling moment form may be used for computing towing heeling moments of the form:

H( )

k

A cos(

) B sin(

)

in this case a constant angle (in the case of towing, the angle of the tow above the horizontal) is included. It may be shown that this is equivalent to:

H( )

k

C cos( ) D sin( )

where: Page 227

Appendix C

R2 1 tan 2 (

C

), D

C tan(

) , R2

A

2

2

B and

tan

B A

General heeling moment with gust

Some criteria require a Gust Ratio, this is the ratio of the magnitude of the wind heeling arm during a gust to the magnitude of the wind heeling arm under steady wind.

H gust

GustRatio

H steady

The general form of the heeling moment is given below. It allows you to specify a constant heeling moment as opposed to a constant heeling arm. Both the steady and the gust heel moment have the same shape.

H steady ( ) H gust ( )

A A

cosn ( ) GustRatio cosn ( )

where: is the heel angle,

A is the magnitude of the heeling moment (mass.length) and A is the magnitude of the heeling arm (length). (mass); thus

the vessel displacement

cosn describes the shape of the curve. It should be noted, that in this case, the definition of gust ratio is the ratio of the heeling arms. Some criteria specify the ratio of the wind speeds; if it is assumed that the wind pressure is proportional to the square of the wind seed, the ratio of the heel arms will be the square of the ratio of the wind speeds. User Defined Heeling Moment

With the User Defined Heeling Moment, the user can specify the number of points and the shape of the heeling moment curve. Defining User Defined Heeling Moments works in much the same as for User Defined Heeling Arm. This heeling moment can then be linked into a Heeling arm criteria (xRef) for evaluation.

Parent Stability Criteria The parent criteria are divided up into different categories depending on their basic types. Criteria at Equilibrium

These criteria are calculated after an equilibrium analysis and relate to the equilibrium position of the vessel after the analysis. The equilibrium criteria are only displayed in the report if you run an equilibrium analysis. Maximum value of Heel, Trim or Slope at Equilibrium

This criterion may be used to check the value of maximum Heel, Pitch or Maximum Slope (compared with an originally horizontal and flat deck). Option

Page 228

Description

Units

Appendix C

The angle of

Shall be less than / Shall not be greater than

Choose from the following (case insensitive auto-completion is used): Heel Pitch MaxSlope Permissible value

deg

deg

Minimum Freeboard at Equilibrium

Checks whether the minimum freeboard is greater than a minimum required value. This could be used to check margin line or downflooding point immersion. Option The value of

Shall be greater than / Shall not be less than

Description Choose from the following (case insensitive auto-completion is used): Marginline DeckEdge DownfloodingPoints PotentialDfloodingPoints EmbarkationPoints ImmersionPoints Permissible value

Units length

length

Maximum Freeboard at Equilibrium

Check that the maximum freeboard is less than a maximum required value. This could be used to check that an embarkation point is sufficiently close to the waterline. Option The value of


Description Choose from the following (case insensitive auto-completion is used): Marginline DeckEdge DownfloodingPoints PotentialDfloodingPoints EmbarkationPoints ImmersionPoints Permissible value

Units length

length

To check that the freeboard lies within a specified range, use a combination of both forms of the minimum/maximum freeboard criteria. Value of GMT or GML at Equilibrium

This criterion is used to check that the GM (transverse or longitudinal) exceeds a specified minimum value. Option The value of

Description Choose from the following (case insensitive auto-completion is used): GMtransverse GMlongitudinal)

Units length

Page 229

Appendix C


Permissible value

length

GZ Curve Criteria (non-heeling arm)

These criteria, calculated from the GZ curve, are calculated from the Large Angle Stability analysis in Hydromax. Value of GMt at

Finds the value of GMt at either a specified heel angle or the equilibrium angle. The criterion is passed if the value of GMt is greater then the required value. GMt is computed from waterplane inertia and immersed volume (not the slope of the GZ curve as this is inaccurate if the heel angle resolution is insufficient). Option specified heel angle angle of equilibrium Shall be greater than / Shall not be less than

Description Value of GMt at either User specified heel angle See Nomenclature Permissible value

Units deg deg length

Value of GZ at

Finds the value of GZ at either a specified heel angle, first peak in GZ curve, angle of maximum GZ or the downflooding angle. The criterion is passed if the value of GZ is greater then the required value. Option specified heel angle angle of first GZ peak angle of maximum GZ first downflooding angle Shall be greater than / Shall not be less than

Description Value of GZ at either User specified heel angle See Nomenclature See Nomenclature See Nomenclature

Units

Permissible value

length

deg deg deg deg

Value of Maximum GZ

Finds the maximum value of GZ within a specified heel angle range. The criterion is passed if the value of GZ is greater than the required value. If you want to check the value of GZ at a certain angle you can set both specified angles as the required angle. If any of the calculated angles for the upper limit are less than the lower limit, they will be ignored when selecting the lowest. If all the upper limit values are less than the lower limit, then the criterion will fail. This functionality is to allow criteria such as “The maximum GZ at 30deg or greater”. Note: Upper limit and analysis heel angle range It is required that the range of heel angles specified for the Large Angle Stability analysis is equal, or exceeds, the upper range heel angle specified in the criterion. Option in the range from the greater of specified heel angle angle of equilibrium Page 230

Description Value of maximum GZ Lower limit for heel angle range, the greater of the following: User specified heel angle See Nomenclature

Units

deg

Appendix C

to the lesser of specified heel angle

angle of first GZ peak angle of maximum GZ first downflooding angle Shall be greater than / Shall not be less than

Upper limit for heel angle range, the lesser of the following: User specified heel angle; this should normally be specified and be less than or equal to the upper limit of the range of heel angles used for the Large Angle Stability analysis. See Nomenclature See Nomenclature See Nomenclature Permissible value

deg

deg deg deg length

Value of Maximum GZ Value of GZ at Specified Angle or Maximum GZ below Specified Angle

If the angle at which maximum GZ occurs is greater than a specified value, the value of GZ at the specified angle is calculated. Otherwise the value of maximum GZ is calculated. The required GZ value depends on the angle at which the maximum occurs, see graph below. Option heel angle at which required GZ is constant

Description If the angle of maximum GZ is greater than or equal to this value, the required value of GZ is constant and is taken at this specified angle. Otherwise the required value of maximum GZ varies as a hyperbolic function with the angle of maximum GZ. This is 0 .

Units deg

Page 231

Appendix C

Option required value of GZ at this angle is

Description Required value of GZ at the heel angle specified above. This is GZ 0 .

Units length

limited by first GZ peak angle

Angle at which GZ is measured may be limited to the location of the first peak in the GZ curve. Angle at which GZ is measured may be limited to first downflooding angle. Permissible value.

deg

limited by first downflooding angle Shall be greater than / Shall not be less than If If

GZ m ax

0

then GZ

GZ m ax

0

then GZ m ax must be greater than

0

deg length

must be greater than the specified, constant value. 0

GZ

0

GZ max

where: is the specified angle at which the required GZ value becomes a constant 0 is the heel angle at which the maximum GZ of value occurs

GZ m a x

GZ

0

is the GZ value at

0

and GZ m ax is the maximum value of GZ.

Variation of required GZ with angle of maximum GZ

The angle at which the GZ was measured is listed in the results. Value of RM at Specified Angle or Maximum RM Below Specified Angle

As above (Value of GZ at specified angle or maximum GZ below specified angle) except the righting moment rather than the righting lever is specified, measured and compared. The righting moment RM is given by:

RM

gGZ

where: is the vessel volume of displacement is the density of the liquid the vessel is floating in is acceleration due to gravity = 9.80665m/s2 g GZ is the righting lever.

Page 232

Appendix C Ratio of GZ Values at Phi1 and Phi2

Calculates the ratio of the GZ values at two specified heel angles. The criterion is passed if the ratio is less then the required value.

Ratio

GZ GZ

1 2

Option Phi1, first heel angle, the lesser of specified heel angle angle of first GZ peak angle of maximum GZ first downflooding angle Phi2, second heel angle, the lesser of specified heel angle angle of first GZ peak angle of maximum GZ first downflooding angle Shall be less than / Shall not be greater than

Description Ratio of GZ values at phi1 and phi2 First heel angle, the lesser of the following: User specified heel angle See Nomenclature See Nomenclature See Nomenclature

Units

deg deg deg deg

Second heel angle, the lesser of the following: User specified heel angle See Nomenclature See Nomenclature See Nomenclature

deg deg deg deg

Permissible value

%

Ratio of GZ values at phi1 and phi2

Page 233

Appendix C Angle of Maximum GZ

Finds the angle at which the value of GZ is a maximum positive value, heel angle can be limited by first peak in GZ curve and/or first downflooding angle. The criterion is passed if the angle is greater then the required value. Option limited by first GZ peak angle limited by first downflooding angle Shall be greater than / Shall not be less than

Description Angle of maximum GZ The angle of maximum GZ shall not be greater than the angle at which the first GZ peak occurs The angle of maximum GZ shall not be greater than the angle at which the first downflooding occurs Permissible value

Units deg

deg

deg

Angle of Equilibrium

Finds the angle of equilibrium from the intersection of the GZ curve with the GZ=0 axis. The criterion is passed if the equilibrium angle is less then the required value. Option Shall be less than / Shall not be greater than

Description Angle of equilibrium Permissible value

Units deg

Ratio of equilibrium heel angle to the lesser of

The equilibrium angle and the lesser of the selected angles are compared. If the ratio is less than the required value, then the criterion is passed. Using a ratio gives more flexibility, e.g.: it is possible to check that the equilibrium angle does not exceed half (or any other fraction) the downflooding angle. The user may choose the type of Key point to define the downflooding angle (downflooding point, potential downflooding point, embarkation point, immersion point). If the equilibrium angle is negative, the user is advised that the vessel should be heeled in the opposite direction and the criterion is failed. Option spec. heel angle angle of margin line immersion angle of deck edge immersion first flooding angle of the angle of first GZ peak angle of max. GZ angle of vanishing stability Shall be less than / Shall not be greater than

Page 234

Description Ratio of equilibrium angle to the lesser of: Specified heel angle Angle of first immersion of the margin line

Units

Angle of first immersion of the deck edge

deg

Smallest immersion angle of the specified type of Key Point Angle of first local peak in GZ curve Angle at which maximum GZ occurs Angle of vanishing stability

deg

Permissible value

%

deg deg

deg deg deg

Appendix C Equilibrium heel angle satisfies either

This criterion is nothing more than two “Ratio of equilibrium heel angle to the lesser of” criteria. The actual criterion is passed if either of the individual criteria is passed. This type of criterion is used to formulate criteria such as: The maximum allowable angle of equilibrium is 15 degrees in the damage condition, but this can be allowed to increase to 17 degrees if the deck edge is not immersed. Angle of Downflooding

Finds the angle of first downflooding. The criterion is passed if the downflooding angle is greater then the required value. Option

Description Angle of downflooding Permissible value


Units deg

Angle of Margin Line Immersion

Finds the first/minimum angle at which the margin line immerses. The criterion is passed if the smallest angle at which the margin line immerses is greater then the required value. Option Shall be greater than / Shall not be less than

Description Angle of margin line immersion Permissible value

Units deg

Angle of Deck Edge Immersion

Finds the first/minimum angle at which the deck edge immerses. The criterion is passed if the smallest angle at which the deck edge immerses is greater then the required value. Option Shall be greater than / Shall not be less than

Description Angle of deck edge immersion Permissible value

Units deg

Angle of Vanishing Stability

Finds the angle of vanishing stability from the intersection of the GZ curve with the GZ=0 axis. The criterion is passed if the angle of vanishing stability is greater then the required value. Option Shall be less than / Shall not be greater than

Description Angle of vanishing stability Permissible value

Units deg

Range of Positive Stability

The angular range for which the GZ curve is positive is computed. The criterion is passed if the computed range is greater then the required value. Option from the greater of

Description Range of positive stability Lower limit

Units

Page 235

Appendix C

Option specified heel angle angle of equilibrium to the lesser of first downflooding angle angle of vanishing stability Shall be greater than / Shall not be less than

Description User specified heel angle See Nomenclature Upper limit of the range See Nomenclature

Units deg deg

See Nomenclature

deg

Permissible value

deg

deg

GZ Area between Limits type 1 - standard

The area below the GZ curve and above the GZ=0 axis is integrated between the selected limits and compared with a minimum required value. The criterion is passed if the area under the graph is greater than the required value. Option from the greater of specified heel angle angle of equilibrium to the lesser of specified heel angle spec. angle above equilibrium angle of first GZ peak angle of maximum GZ first downflooding angle immersion angle of Marginline or DeckEdge angle of vanishing stability Shall be greater than / Shall not be less than

Page 236

Description GZ area between limits type 1 - standard Lower limit for integration, from greatest angle of User specified heel angle See Nomenclature Upper limit of integration, from lesser angle of User specified heel angle User specified heel angle above the equilibrium heel angle See Nomenclature See Nomenclature See Nomenclature

Units

See Nomenclature

deg

See Nomenclature

deg

Permissible value

length.angle

deg deg

deg deg deg deg deg

Appendix C

GZ area between limits type 1 - standard GZ area between limits type 2- HSC monohull type

The area under the GZ curve is integrated between the specified limits. However the required minimum area depends on the upper integration limit. The required area is defined below and is based on the area required for IMO MSC.36(63) §2.3.3.2 and IMO A.749(18) §4.5.6.2.1. The criterion is passed if the computed area under the graph is greater then the required value. The required area is defined as follows: If

m ax

2:

required area = A2 ;

If

m ax

1:

required area = A1 ;

A2 If 1 Where: m ax

m ax

2

: required area =

A1

A2

2

1

2

max

;

is the upper integration limit;

A1 is the area under the GZ curve required at the specified lower heel angle area under the GZ curve required at the specified higher heel angle

1;

and A2 is the

2.

For example, if the lower angle was 15 and the required area at this angle was 0.07m.rad and the upper angle was 30 and the required area at this angle was 0.055m.rad, then the required area would be given by:

A

0.55

0.07 0.055 30 30 15

m ax

or simplifying:

A

0.55 0.001 30

max

Page 237

Appendix C

Variation of required area with upper integration limit

Option

from the greater of specified heel angle angle of equilibrium to the lesser of specified heel angle spec. angle above equilibrium angle of first GZ peak angle of maximum GZ first downflooding angle angle of vanishing stability lower heel angle

required GZ area at lower heel angle higher heel angle required GZ area at higher heel angle Shall be greater than / Shall not be less than

Page 238

Description GZ area between limits type 2- HSC monohull type Lower limit for integration, from greatest angle of User specified heel angle See Nomenclature Upper limit of integration, from smallest angle of User specified heel angle User specified heel angle above the equilibrium heel angle See Nomenclature See Nomenclature See Nomenclature

Units

See Nomenclature

deg

Minimum angle that requires a GZ area greater than... Until this angle the required GZ area is constant Value of GZ area that is required until the lower heel angle Angle from which the required GZ area remains constant onwards Value of GZ area that is required from the higher heel angle onwards Permissible value

deg

deg deg

deg deg deg deg deg

length.angle deg length.angle length.angle

Appendix C

GZ area between limits type 2 - HSC monohull type GZ area between limits type 3 - HSC multihull type

The area under the GZ curve is integrated between the specified limits. However the required 1 1 /( m ax). The required area is defined below minimum area depends on the upper integrationAlimit and is based on the area required for IMO MSC.36 (63) Annex 7 §1.1. The criterion is passed if the computed area under the graph is greater than the required value.

required area = A1 Where: m ax

1

/

m ax

;

is the upper integration limit;

A1 is the area under the GZ curve required at the specified heel angle

1.

For example, if the specified angle ( 1 ) was 30 and the required area at this angle ( A1 ) was 0.055m.rad, then the required area would be given by:

A

0.055 30 /

max

Page 239

Appendix C

Variation of required area with upper integration limit

Option

from the greater of specified heel angle angle of equilibrium to the lesser of specified heel angle spec. angle above equilibrium angle of first GZ peak angle of maximum GZ first downflooding angle angle of vanishing stability higher heel angle required GZ area at higher heel angle Shall be greater than / Shall not be less than

Page 240

Description GZ area between limits type 3 - HSC multihull type Lower limit for integration, from greatest angle of User specified heel angle See Nomenclature Upper limit of integration, from lesser angle of User specified heel angle User specified heel angle above the equilibrium heel angle See Nomenclature See Nomenclature See Nomenclature

Units

See Nomenclature

deg

Heel angle at which required GZ area is specified Value of GZ area that is required until the higher heel angle Permissible value

deg

deg deg

deg deg deg deg deg

length.angle length.angle

Appendix C

GZ area between limits type 3 - HSC multihull type Ratio of GZ area between limits

This criterion calculates the ratio of the two areas between the GZ curve and the GZ=0 axis. 2

GZ

Area 1 Ratio = = abs Area 2

d , where “abs” means the absolute value of.

1 4

abs

GZ

d

3

Option

Description Ratio of GZ area between limits

Area 1 from the greater of

Area 1 lower integration limit,

specified heel angle angle of equilibrium Area 1 to the lesser of

User specified heel angle See Nomenclature

specified heel angle angle of first GZ peak angle of maximum GZ first downflooding angle angle of vanishing stability Area 2 from the lesser of

User specified heel angle See Nomenclature See Nomenclature See Nomenclature See Nomenclature

specified heel angle angle of first GZ peak angle of maximum GZ first downflooding angle angle of vanishing stability

User specified heel angle See Nomenclature See Nomenclature See Nomenclature See Nomenclature

Area 1 upper integration limit,

Area 2 lower integration limit,

Units

1

2

deg deg deg deg deg deg deg deg

3

deg deg deg deg deg Page 241

Appendix C

Option Area 2 to

Description

specified heel angle Shall be greater than / Shall not be less than

User specified heel angle Permissible value

Area 1 upper integration limit,

Units 4

deg %

This criterion is designed to be calculated on the positive side of the GZ curve only; GZ areas below the GZ=0 axis on the negative heel angle side of the GZ curve are not considered positive. Typically, Area 1 would be from equilibrium to vanishing stability and Area 2 would be from vanishing stability to 180 deg, see graph below. In the example below, the lower and upper integration limits for Area 1 are equilibrium and vanishing stability, respectively and the limits for Area 2 are vanishing stability and 180 deg.

Ratio of GZ area between limits – Example 1

In the following example the upper limit for Area 1 has been set to the downflooding angle. The limits for Area 2 remain unchanged.

Page 242

Appendix C

Ratio of GZ area between limits – Example 2

In the final example, the lower integration range for Area 2 has been reduced to the downflooding angle. Note that Area 2 is now A1 – A2.

Ratio of GZ area between limits – Example 3 Ratio of positive to negative GZ area between limits

This criterion calculates the ratio of GZ area above the GZ=0 axis to that below the axis in the given heel angle range. Option

Description

Units Page 243

Appendix C

Option

in the heel angle range from to Shall be greater than / Shall not be less than

Ratio =

Description Ratio of positive to negative GZ area between limits User specified lower limit heel angle User specified upper limit heel angle Permissible value

Units

deg deg %

Area 1 , abs Area 2

where “abs” means the absolute value of. And the areas are defined as follows: If both heel angle limits are ≥ zero: Area 1 is the total area between the GZ curve and GZ=0 axis, where the value of GZ > 0; Area 2 is the total area between the GZ curve and GZ=0 axis, where the value of GZ < 0. Area 1 is positive, Area 2 is negative.

Ratio of positive to negative GZ area between limits. Positive heel: lower limit = 0deg, upper limit = 180deg.

If both heel angle limits are < zero: Area 1 is the total area between the GZ curve and GZ=0 axis, where the value of GZ < 0; Area 2 is the total area between the GZ curve and GZ=0 axis, where the value of GZ > 0. Area 1 is positive, Area 2 is negative.

Page 244

Appendix C

Ratio of positive to negative GZ area between limits. Negative heel: lower limit = -180deg, upper limit = 0deg.

If the lower heel angle limit < zero, and the upper heel angle limit > zero (the upper limit is assumed to be greater than the lower limit): Area 1 is the total area between the GZ curve and GZ=0 axis, where the value of GZ > 0 for heel angles ≥ 0 plus the area between the GZ curve and GZ=0 axis, where the value of GZ < 0 for heel angles < 0; Area 2 is the total area between the GZ curve and GZ=0 axis, where the value of GZ < 0 for heel angles ≥ 0 plus the area between the GZ curve and GZ=0 axis, where the value of GZ > 0 for heel angles < 0. Area 1 is positive, Area 2 is negative.

Ratio of positive to negative GZ area between limits. Positive and negative heel: lower limit = -180deg, upper limit = 180deg.

Page 245

Appendix C Subdivision Index s-factor - MSC 19(58)

Probabilistic damage s-factor according to MSC 19(58) Option Lower angle of range : the greater of

specified heel angle angle of equilibrium Upper angle of range: lesser of

specified heel angle spec. angle above equilibrium angle of first GZ peak angle of maximum GZ first downflooding angle immersion angle of Marginline or DeckEdge angle of vanishing stability Max. GZ limit Range limit

Description The greater of the selected angles is be to specify the lower limit of the range of positive stability and the range in which the maximum value of GZ should be found. User specified heel angle See Nomenclature The lowest of the selected angles is be to specify the upper limit of the range of positive stability and the range in which the maximum value of GZ should be found. See Nomenclature See Nomenclature

Units

See Nomenclature See Nomenclature See Nomenclature See Nomenclature

deg deg deg deg

See Nomenclature Upper limit of allowable maximum GZ value when computing s Upper limit of allowable range of positive stability when computing s

deg length

deg deg

deg deg

deg

S = C sqrt( 0.5 GZmax . range) Both the values of maximum GZ and range of positive stability can be clipped. Heeling arm criteria (xRef)

The cross-reference heeling arm criteria are set up to allow you to define heeling arms or heeling moments in a central location and then cross-reference or link them into the criteria. The criteria themselves work much the same as the Heeling arm criteria (page 247), except for the fact that you don‟t have to specify the heeling arm for each criterion separately, but can simply select which heeling arm you wish to apply. After you have defined your heeling arms, these can be cross-referenced into new heeling arm criteria:

Page 246

Appendix C

The heeling arms are cross-referenced simply by selecting the desired heeling arm from the pull-down list:

For information on defining heeling arms or moments, see Parent Heeling Arms on page 219. Heeling arm criteria

The preferred method is to use the xRef heeling arm criteria rather than the stand alone heeling arm criteria. This is because a wider range of heeling arm formulations is available and for some criteria, they only exist in xRef form. The heeling arm criteria available in the Hydromax Criteria dialog are listed below. Also available are: Multiple heeling arm criteria; these are where the same criterion is applied to up to three heeling arms and/or combinations of these heeling arms Heeling Arm, combined criteria; these are where several criteria are applied to the same heeling arm Value of GMT at equilibrium - general heeling arm

Calculates the transverse metacentric height (GMT) at the intersection of the GZ and heel arm curves. The criterion is passed if the GMT value is greater then the required value. GMT is computed from the waterplane inertia and the displaced volume at the equilibrium heel angle. Ratio of GMT and heeling arm

Calculates the following ratio and the criterion is passed if the ratio exceeds the specified value.

GM sin( )

HA( ) Page 247

Appendix C

Where the heel angle, , is the lesser of: a user-specified heel angle; angle of margin line immersion; angle of deck edge immersion; or first flooding angle of the specified key point type. In addition, this angle may also be multiplied by a user-specified factor. The specified cross-referenced heel arm is then evaluated at this heel angle to give: HA( ) . Finally, The transverse GM is taken at a user-specified heel angle or angle of equilibrium (without heel arm).

Ratio of GMt and heel arm criterion Value of GZ at equilibrium - general heeling arm

Calculates the value of the GZ curve at the equilibrium intersection of the GZ and heel arm curves. The criterion is passed if the GZ value is greater then the required value.

Value of GZ at equilibrium - general heeling arm Value of maximum GZ above heeling arm

Finds the maximum value of (GZ - heel arm) at or above a specified heel angle. The first downflooding angle may be selected as an upper limit. The criterion is passed if the value of (GZ - heel arm) is greater then the required value.

Page 248

Appendix C

Value of maximum GZ above heeling arm

The upper limit may be specified as a certain percentage of the selected limits. This is applied to all selected upper angle limits, including “specified heel angle”. However this option would normally be used to specify an upper limiting angle of “half the angle of margin line immersion”. Maximum ratio of GZ to heeling arm

This criterion calculates the maximum ratio of GZ : Heeling arm (for the same heel angle) within the range of heel angles specified. The value of GZ at this heel angle must be greater than zero. If the heeling arm is zero or negative in the range, then the point with maximum positive GZ (where the heeling arm 0.0) will be selected. The upper limit may be specified as a certain percentage of the selected limits. This is applied to all selected upper angle limits, including “specified heel angle”. However this option would normally be used to specify an upper limiting angle of “half the angle of margin line immersion”. Examples:

Page 249

Appendix C

Upper limit is 50% of angle of margin line immersion (43 / 2 = 21.5 ). In the range 0 to 21.5 , the maximum ratio of GZ:heel arm occurs at 21.5 . At this heel angle the value of GZ is 0.553m and the heel arm 0.930m giving a ratio of 59%.

In this case a constant heeling arm is used, thus the maximum ratio occurs at the angle of maximum GZ (62.4 ). At this heel angle the value of GZ is 1.122m and the heel arm 0.5m giving a ratio of 224%.

Page 250

Appendix C

Finally, the downflooding angle is 94.3 , at this heel angle the heel arm is zero (thus the ratio infinite). Hence the criterion is passed. The angle and value of GZ is given for the location where it is a maximum (in the region where the heel arm is zero; the exact value will depend slightly on the heel angles tested in the Large Angle Stability analysis.)

The same is true if an unusual user-defined heeling arm is used. In this case the heeling arm is zero between 50 and 70 . Hence the maximum ratio reported is infinity and occurs at the angle where GZ is maximum in this heel angle range.

Page 251

Appendix C Minimum ratio of GZ to heeling arm

This criterion calculates the minimum ratio of GZ : Heeling arm (for the same heel angle) within the range of heel angles specified. And checks that this ratio is greater than a specified value. This criterion can be used to check that the GZ is at least as great as the heeling arm over the specified range. If a heeling arm with zero amplitude is used, the same criterion may be used to check that the GZ is positive over the specified range. The upper limit may be specified as a certain percentage of the selected limits. This is applied to all selected upper angle limits, including “specified heel angle”. However this option would normally be used to specify an upper limiting angle of “half the angle of margin line immersion”. Ratio of GZ values at phi1 and phi2 - general heeling arm

Used to check the ratio of GZ values at two points on the GZ curve. The heel arm is used to define the equilibrium angle and the heel angle where (GZ - heel arm) is maximum. The criterion is passed if the ratio is less than the required value.

GZ Ratio = GZ

1 2

Angle of maximum GZ above heeling arm

Calculates the heel angle at which the difference between the GZ curve and the heeling arm is greatest (GZ - Heel Arm is maximum, positive). The criterion is passed if the angle is greater then the required value.

Angle of maximum GZ above heeling arm - general heeling arm Angle of equilibrium - general heeling arm

Calculates the angle of equilibrium with the specified heeling arm. The equilibrium angle is the smallest positive angle where the GZ and heeling arm curves intersect and the GZ curve has positive slope. The criterion is passed if the equilibrium angle is less then the required value.

Page 252

Appendix C

Angle of equilibrium - general heeling arm Angle of equilibrium ratio - general heeling arm

Calculates the ratio of the angle of equilibrium (with the specified heeling arm) to another, selectable angle. The angle of equilibrium is computed as described in §Angle of equilibrium general heeling arm. Ratio =

equilibrium specified

The other angle used to compute the ratio may be one of the following: Required angle for ratio calculation Auto complete text Marginline immersion angle MarginlineImmersionAngle Deck edge immersion angle DeckEdgeImmersionAngle Angle of first GZ peak DownfloodingAngle Angle of maximum GZ MaximumGZAngle First downflooding angle FirstGZPeakAngle Angle of vanishing stability with heel arm VanishingStabilityWithHeelArmAngle

Angle of vanishing stability - general heeling arm

Calculates the location of the first intersection of the GZ curve and heel arm curve where the slope of the GZ curve is negative. The criterion is passed if the angle is greater then the required value. This criterion should not be confused with the range of positive stability.

Page 253

Appendix C

Angle of vanishing stability - general heeling arm Range of positive stability - general heeling arm

Computes the range of positive stability with the heeling arm. [Range of stability] = [Angle of vanishing stability] – [Angle of equilibrium] The criterion is passed if the value of range of stability is greater then the required value.

Range of positive stability - general heeling arm

Page 254

Appendix C GZ area between limits type 1 - general heeling arm

Computes the area below the GZ curve and above the heel arm curve between the specified heel angles. The criterion is passed if the area is greater than the required value. 2

Area =

GZ ( ) heel arm( ) d

1

GZ area between limits type 1 - general heeling arm GZ area between limits type 2 - general heeling arm

The area between the GZ curve and heel arm and the area under the GZ curve is computed (Area 1). The required value is based on a constant plus a proportion of the area under the GZ curve (Area 2). The criterion is passed if the ratio is greater than the required value. 2

Area 1 =

4

Area 2 =


1

3

GZ ( )d

;

;

Area 1 constant kArea 2

Page 255

Appendix C

GZ area between limits type 2 - general heeling arm Ratio of areas type 1 - general heeling arm

The ratio of the area between the GZ curve and heel arm and the area under the GZ curve is computed. This criterion is based on the area ratio required by various Navies‟ turning and passenger crowding criteria. Type 1 stands for which areas are being integrated to calculate the ratio (see graph). The criterion is passed if the ratio is greater than the required value. 2

Area 1 =

4

Area 2 =


1

GZ ( )d

3

Area 1 Ratio = Area 2

Page 256

;

;

Appendix C

Ratio of areas type 1 - general heeling arm Ratio of areas type 2 - general heeling arm

This criterion is used to simulate the effects of wind heeling whilst the vessel is rolling in waves. Because of the many different ways in which this criterion is used it has several options for defining the way in which the areas are calculated. If a gust ratio of greater than 1.0 is used, the vessel is assumed to roll to windward (under the action of waves with the steady wind pressure acting on it, then roll to leeward under a gust. Hence the rollback angle is taken from the equilibrium angle with the steady wind heeling arm, but the integration for Area 1 is taken from the equilibrium with the gust wind heeling arm. The roll back may be specified as either a fixed angular roll back from the angle of equilibrium with the steady wind heel arm or can be rolled back to the vessel equilibrium angle ignoring the wind heeling arms (i.e.: where the GZ curve crosses the GZ=0 axis with positive slope). Note The Large Angle Stability analysis heel angle range should include a sufficient negative range to allow for the rollback angle. For more information see: §Heel. 2

Area 1 = Area 2 =

GZ ( ) gust heel arm( ) d

1

2

gust heel arm( ) GZ ( ) d

1

Area 1 Ratio = Area 2 Page 257

Appendix C

Ratio of areas type 2 - general heeling arm Ratio of areas type 3 - general heeling arm

The ratio of the area under the GZ curve to the area under the heel arm curve is computed. This criterion is based on the area ratio required by BS6349-6:1989. The criterion is passed if the ratio is greater than the required value. Areas under the GZ=0 axis are counted as negative. Area GZ =

2

GZ ( )d ;

1

Area HA =

2

heel arm( )d ;

1

Ratio =

Page 258

Area GZ Area HA

Appendix C

Ratio of areas type 3 - general heeling arm

Multiple heeling arm criteria

These criteria are used to check the effects of combinations of up to three heeling arms and their combinations, for example passenger crowding, turning, wind. The combined heeling arms are computed by adding the values of the individual heeling arms at each heel angle. Ratio of GZ values at phi1 and phi2 - multiple heeling arms

Checks the ratio of GZ values as per §Ratio of GZ values at phi1 and phi2 - general heeling arm with the specified heeling arms.

Page 259

Appendix C

Ratio of GZ values at phi1 and phi2 - multiple heeling arms Angle of equilibrium - multiple heeling arms

Checks the equilibrium heel angle as per §Angle of equilibrium - general heeling arm with the specified heeling arms.

Angle of equilibrium - multiple heeling arms GZ area between limits type 1 - multiple heeling arms

Checks the area under the heel angle as per §GZ area between limits type 1 - general heeling arm with the specified heeling arms. Page 260

Appendix C

GZ area between limits type 1 - multiple heeling arms GZ area between limits type 2 - multiple heeling arms

Checks the area under the heel angle as per §GZ area between limits type 2 - general heeling arm with the specified heeling arms. 2

Area 1 =

4

Area 2 =


1

3

GZ ( )d

;

;

Area 1 constant kArea 2

Page 261

Appendix C

GZ area between limits type 2 - general heeling arm Ratio of areas type 1 - multiple heeling arms

Checks the area under the heel angle as per §Ratio of areas type 1 - general heeling arm with the specified heeling arms.

Page 262

Appendix C

Ratio of areas type 1 - multiple heeling arms Subdivision Index s-factor - MSC_216(82)

The Subdivision Index s-factor as described in IMO MSC.216(82) is computed. Several extra options are presented to the user.

Page 263

Appendix C

Page 264

Option

Description Subdivision Index s-factor – MSC.216(82)

Units

Vessel type : Passenger, Cargo, User

The type of vessel being analysed. This is used to determine default parameters and which s-factors should be computed.

Upper angle of range: lesser of

The lowest of the selected angles can be used to specify the upper limit of the range of positive stability. The beginning of the range of positive stability is taken as the first positive equilibrium angles

first downflooding angle

See Nomenclature

deg

angle of vanishing stability

See Nomenclature

deg

Immersion angle of Marginline or DeckEdge

See Nomenclature

deg

s-Final

Parameters for computing the s-Final factor

Max. GZ limit

Upper limit of allowable maximum GZ value when computing s-Final

length

Range limit

Upper limit of allowable range of positive stability when computing sFinal

deg

K-factor min. heel

Theta_min used to determine K

deg

K-factor max. heel

Theta_max used to determine K

deg

s-Intermediate

Parameters for computing the sIntermediate factor

Max. GZ limit

Upper limit of allowable maximum GZ value when computing s-Intermediate

length

Range limit

Upper limit of allowable range of positive stability when computing sIntermediate

deg

Max. allowable equilibrium heel angle

Maximum allowable equilibrium heel angle after damage. If the equilibrium heel angle exceeds this value then sIntermediate is zero.

deg

s-Moment

Parameters for computing the sMoment factor

intact displacement at subdivision draft

Displacement of the intact vessel at the subdivision draft

mass

GZ reduction

Reduction to be applied to maximum GZ

length

Passenger heel

Link to passenger heeling moment

mass.length

Appendix C

moment Wind heel moment

Link to wind heeling moment

mass.length

Select survival craft heel moment

Link to heeling moment that defines the effect of launching survival craft

mass.length


Permissible minimum value for sfactor

Vessel type: If Passenger is selected, then s-Intermediate and s-Moment factors are computed. For the s-Final factor, the minimum and maximum heel angles are set to 7 and 15 deg. respectively. The criterion result is then the minimum value of s-Intermediate and (s-Final * s-Moment). If Cargo is selected, then only the s-Final factor is computed and in this case, the minimum and maximum heel angles are set to 25 and 30 deg. respectively. If User is selected, then all three s-factors are computed as for the Passenger ship, and any values for the s-Final factor minimum and maximum heel angles may be specified. s-Final = K. {GZmax / limitGZmax . Range / limitRange}1/4 where: K = 1 if equilibrium heel <= Theta_min K = 0 if equilibrium heel >= Theta_max K = {(Theta_max – equilibrium heel) / (Theta_max – Theta_min)}1/2 s-Intermediate = {GZmax / limitGZmax . Range / limitRange}1/4 if equilibrium heel > Max. allowable equilibrium heel angle then s-Intermediate = 0 s-Moment = (GZmax – GZ reduction) . Displacement / Mheel where: Mheel is the maximum of the three selected heeling moments. The result is the minimum of s-Intermediate and (s-Final * s-Moment). All s-factors are in the range 0 <= s <= 1 Heeling arm, combined criteria

Several criteria require the evaluation of several individual criteria components. Although it is possible to evaluate these criteria by evaluation of their individual components, for simplicity the common combinations have been combined into single criteria. Note: At least one of the individual criteria has to be selected. Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) - general heeling arm

This is a combined criterion where three individual criteria must be met. These are: 1. Angle of steady heel must be less than a specified value. The Angle of steady heel is obtained as per §Angle of equilibrium - general heeling arm. 2. The area ratio must be greater than a specified value. The area ratio is evaluated as per § Ratio of areas type 1 - general heeling arm 3. The ratio of the value of GZ at equilibrium to the value of maximum GZ must be less than a specified value.

Page 265

Appendix C

Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) - general heeling arm Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 2) - general wind heeling arm

This is a widely applicable wind heeling criterion in its most generic format. The heeling arm is specified simply by a magnitude and cosine power. Optionally, a gust wind can be applied. 1. Angle of steady heel must be less than a specified value. The angle of steady heel is obtained as per Angle of equilibrium - general heeling arm. 2. The area ratio must be greater than a specified value. The area ratio is evaluated as per Ratio of areas type 2 - general heeling arm. 3. The ratio of the value of GZ at equilibrium to the value of maximum GZ must be less than a specified value. Note The Large Angle Stability analysis heel angle range should include a sufficient negative range to allow for the rollback angle. For more information see: §Heel.

Page 266

Appendix C

Area definition

If required, a reduction of the GZ curve may be applied. If this is done, all calculations are done using a reduced GZ‟ curve which is computed at each heel angle as follows:

GZ ' ( )

GZ ( ) B cos m ( )

This criterion may be used to evaluate the following specific criteria (as well as many others of similar format): US Navy DDS079-1: §079-1-c(9) 1, §079-1-c(9) 4, Royal Navy NES 109: §1.2.2, §1.3.5, §1.4.2 Initial impulse and Wind heeling criteria RAN A015866: §4.4.4.2, §4.8, §4.9.5 IMO A.749(18) Code on intact stability: §3.2 IMO MSC.36(63) High-speed craft code §2.3.3.1 ISO/FDIS 12217-1:2002(E) Small Non-Sailing Boats §6.3.2

Page 267

Appendix C Derived heeling arm criteria

For these criteria, the magnitude of the heeling arm is derived (rather than specified directly) from a required relationship between the GZ curve and the heeling arm curve. The shape of the heeling arm (e.g. cos1.3) must be specified. The heeling arm is normally derived from a GZ value, GZ area or angle of equilibrium requirement. The criterion is then evaluated by comparing some requirement of the derived heeling arm with a specified value. GZ derived heeling arm

This criterion is used to calculate the amplitude of a heeling arm derived from the value of GZ at a certain heel angle. The GZ value used to define the heeling arm is the GZ at one of the following heel angles: specified angle of heel angle of first peak in GZ curve angle at which maximum GZ occurs angle of first downflooding immersion angle of margin line or deck edge

The heeling arm is then calculated as described by the equation below, and is then compared with a minimum required value.

A

GZ cosn

where:

A n

Amplitude of heeling arm Shape of heeling arm (n = 0 for constant heeling arm) Specified heel angle

GZ

Value of GZ at specified heel angle Required ratio = GZ / HA

GZ area derived heeling arm type 1

This criterion is used to calculate the amplitude of a heeling arm derived from the area under the GZ curve between specified limits. The area under both the GZ and heeling arm curves is integrated between the same specified limits, see below. Lower integration limit,

1:

specified angle of heel angle of equilibrium

Upper integration limit,

2:

spec. heel angle spec. angle above equilibrium angle of first GZ peak angle of max. GZ first downflooding angle angle of vanishing stability

It is also possible to specify a minimum heel angle for the upper integration limit. Any negative areas (due to negative GZ) up to this minimum upper integration heel angle will be deducted from the total area under the GZ curve.

Page 268

Appendix C

The amplitude of the heeling, which satisfies the equation below arm is then found and compared with a minimum required value. 2 2

A cos n

d

GZ d

1

1

A

Amplitude of heeling arm Shape of heeling arm (n = 0 for constant heeling arm) heel angle GZ curve Required ratio

n

GZ

GZ area derived heeling arm type 2

This criterion is used to simulate the effects of wind heeling whilst the vessel is rolling in waves. Because of the many different ways in which this criterion is used it has several options for defining the way in which the areas are calculated. With the wind pressure acting on it, the vessel is assumed to roll to windward under the action of waves and then roll to leeward. The rollback angle is taken from the equilibrium angle with the wind heeling arm. A heeling arm of prescribed shape is found such that the specified area ratio is met. The amplitude of the heeling arm is then compared with a required minimum value. The roll back may be specified as either: a fixed angular roll back from the angle of equilibrium with the wind heel arm; roll back to the vessel equilibrium angle ignoring the wind heeling arms (i.e.: where the GZ curve crosses the GZ=0 axis with positive slope); or roll back to a specified heel angle.

Note The Large Angle Stability analysis heel angle range should include a sufficient negative range to allow for the rollback angle. For more information see: §Heel. Area 1 =

2


1

Area 2 =

2

heel arm( ) GZ ( ) d

1

Area 1 Ratio = Area 2

Page 269

Appendix C

GZ area derived heeling arm (type 2) - general heeling arm Angle of equilibrium - GZ derived wind heeling arm

The derived wind heeling criterion is used to check that the steady heel angle due to wind pressure exceeds a certain value. The steady heel arm is derived from a gust of specified ratio. The wind gust will cause the vessel to heel over to the lesser of a specified heel angle, angle of the first GZ peak, angle of maximum GZ or the first downflooding angle. The vessel is assumed to be safe from gusts up to the specified ratio, if the angle of steady heel is greater than the angle. This means that the lesser of: a specified heel angle, first peak in GZ curve, angle of maximum GZ or the first downflooding angle, should be large enough to withstand a gust from a steady wind heeling angle larger than ….

Angle of equilibrium - derived wind heeling arm

Page 270

Appendix C Ratio of equilibrium angles - GZ area derived heeling arm

This criterion is used to compare the equilibrium angles with two different heeling arms. The first equilibrium angle, φ1, is the angle of equilibrium with a derived heeling arm. The second equilibrium angle, φ2, is the angle of equilibrium with a specified heeling arm. The derived heeling arm is chosen such that the areas, A1 and A2, are in the specified ratio. There are several options which can be used to define the upper and lower ranges for the area integrations. The specified heeling arm is specified by an amplitude and cosine power; the same cosine power is used for both the specified and the derived heeling arms.

Ratio of equilibrium angles - derived heeling arm

Area 1 =

2


1

Area 2 =

2

heel arm( ) GZ ( ) d

1

Area 1 Ratio of areas = Area 2 φ1 = Angle of equilibrium with heeling arm derived from required area ratio (purple heeling arm) φ2 = Angle of equilibrium with specified heeling arm (orange heeling arm) The criterion is passed if the ratio φ2 : φ1 is less than the required value. Thus if it is required that φ2 be less than φ1, then the ratio φ2 : φ1 must be less than unity. Option A

Description Magnitude of specified heeling arm

Units length Page 271

Appendix C

n required area ratio Area1 / Area2 options options options

required value

Cosine power to describe shape of both specified and derived heelning arms The required area ratio used to find the derived heeling arm magnitude Specify lower integration limit for Area1 Specify upper integration limit for Area1 Specify lower integration limit for Area2; the upper integration limit is always the angle of equilibrium with derived heel arm Specifies the maximum allowable ratio of equilibrium heel angle with the specified heel arm to the equilibrium heel angle with the derived heel arm (phi2 / phi1). This value is normally less than or equal to 100%, indicating that the equilibrium heel angle with the specified heel arm must be less than the equilibrium heel angle with the derived heel arm

deg deg deg

Note The Large Angle Stability analysis heel angle range should include a sufficient negative range to allow for the rollback angle. For more information see: §Heel. Other combined criteria

Other criteria, which do not easily fall into the categories above, are found here. Other criteria - STIX

The stability index criterion or STIX criterion as described in ISO/FDIS 12217-2:2002(E) is used to assess the stability of sailing craft. The required input parameters are described below. Please refer to ISO/FDIS 12217-2:2002(E) for exact definitions of parameters and how they should be calculated. Option delta

AS, sail area ISO 8666

height of centroid of AS

LH, length

Page 272

Description Adjustment to STIX rating, either 0 or 5. 5 if the vessel, when fully flooded with water, has reserve buoyancy and positive righting lever at a heel angle of 90º . 0 in all other cases. Sail area as defined in ISO 8666. Note that no additional windage areas are calculated by Hydromax for this criterion. Height of sail area centre of effort from model‟s vertical datum (not necessarily the waterline, this is not the same as the STIX variable hCE which is measured from the waterline, positive up). Hull length as defined by ISO 8666. This may be either specified or calculated by Hydromax. Hydromax calculates this parameter as the overall length of the vessel (all hull surfaces) in the upright, zero trim condition.

Units

length2

length

length

Appendix C

Option BH, beam of hull

LWL, length waterline

BWL, beam waterline

height of immersed profile area centroid


Description Hull beam as defined by ISO 8666. This may be either specified or calculated by Hydromax. Hydromax calculates this parameter as the overall beam of the vessel (all hull surfaces) in the upright, zero trim condition. Hull waterline length in the current load condition as defined by ISO 8666. This may be either specified or calculated by Hydromax. Hydromax calculates this parameter as the waterline length of the vessel (all hull surfaces) at zero heel and at the loadcase displacement and centre of gravity; if the analysis is carried out freeto-trim, the waterline of the trimmed vessel is used. Hull waterline beam in the current load condition as defined by ISO 8666. This may be either specified or calculated by Hydromax. Hydromax calculates this parameter as the waterline beam of the vessel (all hull surfaces) at zero heel and at the loadcase displacement and centre of gravity; if the analysis is carried out freeto-trim, the waterline of the trimmed vessel is used. Height of centre of the lateral projected immersed area of the hull from model‟s vertical datum (not necessarily the waterline, this is not the same as the STIX variable hLP ); may be specified or calculated by Hydromax. Hydromax calculates this parameter at zero heel and at the loadcase displacement and centre of gravity; if the analysis is carried out freeto-trim, the waterline of the trimmed vessel is used. Hydromax uses the numerical STIX rating value rather than the STIX design category.

Units length

length

length

length

Hydromax calculates the various factors and STIX rating according to ISO/FDIS 122172:2002(E). Note that a downflooding angle is required to calculate the STIX index. Hence, if no downflooding points are defined, or defined downflooding points do not immerse within the selected heel angle range, the angle of downflooding is taken to be the largest heel angle tested. This affects the calculation of the Wind Moment and Downflooding factors. Specific stand alone heeling arm criteria

These criteria provide some specific stand alone heeling arm criteria. They are included for compatibility with criteria sets defined in earlier versions of Hydromax, but it is highly recommended to use the equivalent xRef criteria with the desired heeling arms.

Page 273

Appendix C Stand alone heeling arm criteria Angle of equilibrium - passenger crowding heeling arm

Calculates the angle of equilibrium with the heeling arm due to passenger crowding applied. The heeling arm is calculated from the number, weight and location of the passengers, see §Passenger crowding. Angle of equilibrium - high-speed turn heeling arm

Calculates the angle of equilibrium with the heeling arm due to high speed turning applied. The heeling arm is calculated from the turn radius, vessel speed and height of the vessel‟s centre of gravity, see §Turning. Ratio of areas type 1 - general cos+sin heeling arm

This is a very similar criterion to § Ratio of areas type 1 - general heeling arm; the only difference being the shape of the heel arm. In this criterion the heel arm has both a sine and a cosine component. This is used to simulate the effects of lifting weights and is used by several Navies. The modified form of the heeling arm is given below, for further information also see §General cos+sin heeling arm

H( )

k A cos n ( ) 2

Area 1 =


1

4

Area 2 =

B sin m ( )

GZ ( )d

3

;

;

Area 1 Ratio = Area 2 Stand alone heeling arm combined criteria Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) - passenger crowding

This criterion is essentially the same as its generic form: Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) - general heeling arm, however the heel arm is the specific passenger crowding form. Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) - high-speed turn

This criterion is essentially the same as its generic form: Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) - general heeling arm, however the heel arm is the specific high-speed turning form. Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) - general cos+sin heeling arm

The lifting criterion is the same as the Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) - general heeling arm except that the heel arm has both a cos and sin component.

Page 274

Appendix C

Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) – cos+sin heeling arm Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) - lifting weight

This criterion is essentially the same as its generic form: Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) - general cos+sin heeling arm, however the heel arm is the specific lifting of a heavy weight form. Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) - towing

This criterion is essentially the same as its generic form: Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) - general cos+sin heeling arm, however the heel arm is the specific towing form. Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 2) - wind heeling arm

This criterion is exactly the same as §Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 2) - general wind heeling arm except that the magnitude of the heeling arm is automatically calculated from the wind pressure (or velocity), projected area and area lever information.

Page 275

Appendix C

Area definition

Note The Large Angle Stability analysis heel angle range should include a sufficient negative range to allow for the rollback angle. For more information see: §Heel.

Page 276

Appendix C

Appendix D: Specific Criteria In Hydromax, we have tried to distil the essence of the various stability criteria and present them in their simplest form whilst preserving the physical significance of the stability characteristic under assessment. In some cases, what is essentially the same criterion, is presented in quite different ways by different regulatory bodies. In Hydromax we have always sought to keep the physical significance transparent in the formulation – for this reason, constants such as acceleration due to gravity are explicitly shown in the formulations and consistent units are used – thus removing the need for obscure constants with strange units. In this section we look at some common criteria and demonstrate how they may be evaluated in Hydromax.

Dynamic stability criteria In some cases the criteria are expressed in terms of the so-called dynamic stability curve. This is the integral of the GZ curve where the ordinate is the area under the GZ curve integrated from zero to the heel angle in question. Remembering this relationship and that the slope of the dynamic stability curve is the value of GZ it is often possible to reformulate the same criterion in terms of one based on the GZ curve. Capsizing moment

Often a capsizing moment is determined from the dynamic stability curve by drawing a line through the origin which is tangent to the GZ area curve. This is the dynamic heeling arm curve (blue) and is the integral of a constant value heeling arm. The capsizing moment is taken as the magnitude of GZ at this tangent heel angle 2 . The problem is to reformulate this so that this capsizing moment can be found from the GZ curve:

Dynamic stability curve and Dynamic heeling arm.

From the figure above we can see that the slopes of both curves are the same at 1 and 2 ; from this we can deduce that the value of GZ and Heeling arm are the same at these angles. Furthermore, at 2 , the values are the same indicating that the areas under each curve from 0 to 2 are the same. Finally since the dynamic heeling arm is a straight line with constant slope we know that the corresponding heeling arm is a constant value. From these facts we can derive the following GZ and heeling arm curves:

Page 277

Appendix C

Stability curve, Area 1 corresponds to the area under the heeling arm curve up to the second intercept

Stability curve, Area 2 corresponds to the area under the GZ curve up to the second intercept

Knowing that Area1 = Area2 we can deduce that Area 3 = Area 4 in the figure below:

Page 278

Appendix C

The magnitude of the heeling arm must be chosen so that Area 3 = Area 4

So the capsizing moment can also be determined by finding the heeling moment that gives Area3 = Area4. This can easily be done in Hydromax using the GZ area derived heeling arm type 2 criterion.

Heeling arms for specific criteria - Note on unit conversion There are quite a few different ways in which different authorities define their heeling arms. The approach that has been taken in Hydromax is to reflect the physics of what is generating the heeling moment. Be careful as some criteria specify heeling arms and some specify heeling moments or “moments” in mass.length. All Hydromax criteria use a heeling arm since this is what is ultimately plotted on the GZ curve. To obtain the heeling arm from the heeling moment, it is necessary to divide by vessel weight ( g ); and in the case of “moments” in mass.length, it is necessary to divide by vessel mass. Hydromax uses an internal conversion of knots to m/s based on the International Nautical mile which is defined as exactly 1852m (International Hydrographic Conference, Monaco, 1929). Thus 1 knot = 1852/3600 = 0.5144444... m/s. (Note that the UK nautical mile is 6080ft = 1853.184m; giving a conversion multiplier for knots to m/s of 0.51477333...) In the following section, the conversions for some common criteria have been explained. IMO Code on Intact Stability A.749(18) amended to MSC.75(69)

3.1.2.6 - Heeling due to turning Heeling moment defined by:

MR

0.2

V02 L

tonne

KG

d [kNm] 2

Where:

MR

= heeling moment in kNm

V0

= service speed in m/s = length of ship at waterline in m

L tonne

= displacement in tonne Page 279

Appendix C

d KG

= mean draft m = height of centre of gravity above keel in m

Hence the heeling arm, H R

HR

0 .2

V02 KG L 1000

1000 M R / g [m], is given by: d 1000 2 g

0.2

V02 KG Lg

d [m] 2

Where:

g

= standard acceleration due to gravity = 9.80665 m/s2 = displacement in kg

The heeling arm in Hydromax is defined as:

HR

a

V2 Rg

h [m],

Where:

V R h a

= vessel speed in m/s = radius of turn in m = height of centre of gravity above centre of lateral resistance in m = non-dimensional constant (theoretically unity)

Thus equating the required IMO heeling arm to the Hydromax heeling arm, we obtain:

a

V2

V02 0.2 KG Lg

h

Rg

d 2

Equating similar terms:

h

KG

V

d 2

V0

and assuming that the ratio of the turn radius to the vessel length is 5.1:1, we obtain:

R L

510%

and

a

0.2 510% 1.02 L Note that it suffices that a 1.02 and any ratio of turn radius to vessel length and constant R a that satisfies this relationship may be chosen, the choice of a ratio of 5.1:1 merely gives a constant approaching the theoretically correct value of unity. 3.2 - Severe wind and rolling criterion (weather criterion) Heeling arm defined by:

PAZ 1000 g 9.81

lw1

tonne

[m]

Where:

l w1

P Page 280

= heeling arm in m = wind pressure in Pa

Appendix C

= projected lateral windage in m2 = vertical separation of centroids of A and underwater lateral area in m

A Z

= displacement in tonne

tonne

g 9.81

= IMO assumed value of gravitational acceleration - 9.81m/s2


Hw

a

PA(h H ) g [m]

Where:

g

= standard acceleration due to gravity = 9.80665 m/s2 = displacement in kg = height of centroid of A in m = height of centroid of underwater lateral area in m = non-dimensional constant (theoretically unity)

h H a


a

PA(h H ) g

PAZ 1000 g 9.81

tonne


h H

Z

and

g

a

g 9.81

9.80665 9.81

0.99966

IMO HSC Code MSC.36(63)

Annex 6 1.1.4 - Heeling moment due to wind pressure Heeling moment defined by:

Mv

0.001 PAZ [kNm]

Where:

Mv

P A Z

= heeling moment in kNm = wind pressure in Pa = projected lateral windage in m2 = vertical separation of centroids of A and underwater lateral area in m

Hence the heeling arm, H v

HR

0.001 PAZ

1000 g

1000 M v / g [m], is given by: PAZ g [m]

Where:

g

= standard acceleration due to gravity = 9.80665 m/s2 = displacement in kg


Page 281

Appendix C

Hw

a

PA(h H ) g [m]

Where:

g

= standard acceleration due to gravity = 9.80665 m/s2 = displacement in kg = height of centroid of A in m = height of centroid of underwater lateral area in m = non-dimensional constant (theoretically unity)

h H a


a

PA(h H ) g

PAZ g


h H

Z

and

a 1.0 Annex 7 1.3 - Heeling due to wind Heeling arm defined by:

PAZ 9800 tonne [m]

HL1 Where:

HL1

= heeling arm in m = wind pressure in Pa = projected lateral windage in m2 = vertical separation of centroid of A and half the lightest service draft in

P A Z m

= displacement in tonne

tonne


Hw

a

PA(h H ) g [m]

Where:

g h H a

= standard acceleration due to gravity = 9.80665 m/s2 = displacement in kg = height of centroid of A in m = height of half the lightest service draft in m = non-dimensional constant (theoretically unity)



h H Page 282

Z

Appendix C

and

g 9800

a

9.80665 9.8

tonne

1.00068

Where the effect of wind plus gust is required, the factor a should be multiplied by the gust factor – typically 1.5. Hence, in the case of wind plus gust, a becomes 1.50102 USL code (Australia)

USL C.1.1.3 - Wind heeling moment USL wind heeling “moment” is specified as:

M

0.000102PA(h H ) [tonne.m]

Where:

h H P A

= height of centroid of A in m = height of centroid of underwater lateral area in m = wind pressure in Pa = projected lateral windage in m2

Thus the heeling arm is given by:

H

0.000102PA(h H )

1000 [m]


H

a

PA(h H ) g [m]

Where:

g

= standard acceleration due to gravity = 9.80665 m/s2 = displacement in kg = non-dimensional constant (theoretically unity)

a

Thus equating:

H

a

PA(h H ) g

0.000102 PA(h H )

1000

simplifying and rearranging:

a

0.000102 1000.0 g

0.102 9.80665 1.0002783

USL C.1.1.4 - Heeling moment due to turning USL wind heeling “moment” is specified as:

M

0.0053

2 v kts

tonnes

L

h [tonne.m]

Where:

v kts tonne

= vessel speed in knots = displacement in tonne Page 283

Appendix C

h L

= height of centre of gravity above centre of lateral resistance in m = waterline length of vessel in m

Thus the heeling arm is given by:

H

0.0053

2 v kts

tonnes

h1

1000 .0

L

[m]

Where: = displacement in kg The heeling arm in Hydromax is defined as:

H

a

V2 Rg

h [m],

Where:

V R h a

= vessel speed in m/s = radius of turn in m = height of centre of gravity above centre of lateral resistance in m = non-dimensional constant (theoretically unity)

Thus equating the required USL heeling arm to the Hydromax heeling arm, we obtain:

a

V2 Rg

h

0.0053

2 vkts

tonnes

h1

1000.0

L

simplifying and rearranging:

a

5.3g

2 R v kts L V2

tonnes

R 1 1 2 L 0.5144 1000 .0

5.3g

finally, with g = 9.80665 [ms-2]:

a

0.196424

R L

R Assuming that the ratio of the turn radius to the vessel length, L

a

509% gives a value for a:

0.196424 509% 0.999798 a

R L

0.196424

Note that it suffices that , and any ratio of turn radius to vessel length and constant a that satisfies this relationship may be chosen, the choice of a ratio of 509% merely gives a constant approaching the theoretically correct value of unity. ISO 12217-1:2002(E)

This section explains how the ISO 12217-1 code calculates the heeling arm and how you can replicate this calculation with a Hydromax criterion. “6.3.2 Rolling in beam waves and wind The curve of righting moments of the boat shall be established up to the downflooding angle or the angle of vanishing stability or 50°, whichever is the least, using annex D. The heeling moment due to wind, MW, expressed in newton metres, is assumed to be constant at all angles of heel and shall be calculated as follows: Page 284

Appendix C

MW = 0.3 ALV * (ALV / LWL + TM)* vW2 Where LWL is the waterline length; TM is the draft at the mid-point of the waterline length, expressed in metres; vW = 28 m/s for design category A, and 21 m/s for design category B; ALV is the windage area as defined in 3.3.7, but shall not be taken as less than 0.55*LH * BH.” Basically they are using moment = force * lever, where the force is calculated as 0.3 * ALV * vW2, and the lever is (ALV / LWL + TM) This lever is a bit confusing so let‟s concentrate on that. Hydromax‟ wind heeling arm calculation uses H for the vertical height of the hydrodynamic centre (underwater area) and h as the vertical height of the aerodynamic centre (windage area) – all measured consistently from the zero point, positive up. Thus the lever is (h-H) in Hydromax should be the same as the (ALV / LWL + TM) lever from ISO. You can calculate (ALV / LWL + TM) manually and then make sure the (h-H) value in Hydromax is the same by specifying: Velocity based heeling arm; H = 0.0; h = (ALV / LWL + TM); a = 0.3 kg/m3 Note: the centre of the windage area -h- applies to the additional windage area or the total windage area depending on which option you have selected. Make sure you check your total windage lever in the intermediate results in the criteria results tab of the Results window. For example, supposing we have a vessel with the following characteristics: Displacement 105.7 tonne = 1037 kN LH 24 m BH 5 m LWL 21.1 m TM 1.9 m vW 28 m/s for design category A ALV 72 m2 ( this is greater than 0.55 LH BH = 66 m2) Thus according to the ISO 12217 formula, the heeling moment is given as: MW = 0.3 * 72 * (72 / 21.1 + 1.9) * 282 = 89961 Nm Thus the heeling arm = MW / Displacement = 89961 / 1037000 = 0.0868 m The input for Hydromax requires: Total area A = 72 m2; area centroid height: h = ALV / LWL + TM = 72 / 21.1 + 1.9 = 5.312 m; a = 0.3 kg/m3 giving the expected result for heeling arm amplitude:

Page 285

Appendix C

Intermediate results for the wind heeling arm.

ISO 12217: Small craft – stability and buoyancy assessment and categorisation.

This section gives some details on implementing the ISO 12217 stability criteria in Hydromax. See also the note on converting units for the definition of the heeling arms in ISO 122171:2002(E). Part 1: Non-sailing boats of hull length greater than or equal to 6m

In many cases the user must determine the required pass value for the criteria, which depends on the category and length of vessel being tested. In most cases the default required value would exceed the worst case. 6.1.2: Downflooding height Minimum freeboard to downflooding points must be determined from Figures 2 and 3 (Section 6.1.2) and entered into the required value field; the default value is set at 1.42m which is slightly greater than the height required for a category A vessel of 24m in length. 6.1.3: Downflooding angle Must be greater than a certain value as determined according to the design category; see Tables 3 and 4 (Sections 6.1.3, 6.2). The default value is set to 49.7 6.2: Offset-load test There are several ways of evaluating this criterion: 1. Define a heeling arm and calculate the intersection of the heeling arm with the GZ curve to determine the angle of equilibrium. 2. Specify a loadcase with the offset load specified and carry out an equilibrium analysis. Verify that the angle of equilibrium does not exceed the maximum permissible value. An additional requirement in this section is that a specified freeboard must be exceeded. 6.3: Resistance to wind and waves Determine the windage area and lever and enter them in the appropriate fields in the criterion. Also determine the required wind speed and roll-back angle (depending on the design category) and enter these values. In Hydromax, there is no option for placing the height, H, of the centre of lateral resistance at the bottom of the vessel, so this must be specified manually (it is measured from the model zero point, positive upwards). 6.3.3: Resistance to waves This criterion comprises two parts, one to check that the righting moment is sufficient and a second to determine whether the righting lever is sufficient. 6.4: Heel due to wind action Page 286

Appendix C

Determine the parameters required for calculation of the wind heeling moment as per 6.3, but note the different wind speeds to be used. Determine the limiting heel angle from Table 4 (Sections 6.2) Part 2: Sailing boats of hull length greater than or equal to 6m

6.2.2: Downflooding height Minimum freeboard to downflooding points must be determined from Figure 2 (Section 6.2.2) and entered into the required value field, the default value is set at 1.42m which is slightly greater than the height required for a category A vessel of 24m in length. 6.2.3: Downflooding angle Must be greater than a certain value as determined according to the design category, see Tables 3 (Sections 6.2.3). The default value is set to 40 6.3: Angle of vanishing stability Determine the required angle of vanishing stability which depends on design category and vessel displacement. The default value is 130. 6.4: Stability index (STIX) Determine the required STIX value depending on the design category, see Table 5 (Section 6.4.9). Also specify the sail area and vertical position of the sail area centroid and enter these values in the appropriate fields in the criterion. If desired you can specify the other values or let Hydromax calculate them for you. 6.5: Knockdown-recovery test The test can be approximated by examining the angle of vanishing stability in the flooded condition. If the flooded vessel has positive GZ at the knockdown angle, it should self right. 6.6.6: Wind stiffness test Determine the wind heeling moment as defined in 6.6.6 for the wind speed of interest (Table 6, Section 6.6.7). Convert this to a heeling lever. Calculate the GZ curve with the crew seated to windward, this criterion will then look at the angle of equilibrium of the vessel under the applied wind heeling arm. Part 3: Boats of hull length less than 6m

These criteria are evaluated after an equilibrium analysis under the specified loading condition. Non-Sailing Boats: 6.2.2: Downflooding-height tests Determine the required downflooding height and specify the appropriate loading condition. The criterion is evaluated after an equilibrium analysis. 6.3: Offset-load test This criterion is most effectively evaluated by performing an equilibrium analysis with the required offset loading condition Sailing Boats: 7.2: Downflooding height Minimum freeboard to downflooding points must be determined from Figure 2 (Section 6.2.2) and entered into the required value field, the default value is set at 1.42m which is slightly greater than the height required for a category A vessel of 24m in length. 7.5: Knockdown-recovery test The test can be approximated by examining the angle of vanishing stability in the flooded condition. If the flooded vessel has positive GZ at the knockdown angle, it should self right. 7.6.6: Wind stiffness test Page 287

Appendix C

Determine the wind heeling moment as defined in 6.6.6 for the wind speed of interest (Table 6, Section 6.6.7). Convert this to a heeling lever. Calculate the GZ curve with the crew seated to windward, this criterion will then look at the angle of equilibrium of the vessel under the applied wind heeling arm.

Page 288

Appendix C

Appendix E: Reference Tables This appendix contains the following reference tables: File Extension Reference Table Analysis settings reference table

File Extension Reference Table The following table lists files that are used in Hydromax. The .hmd file contains all the additional information that defines the Hydromax model and you need only save this file when working in Hydromax. However, if you wish to transfer loadcases or compartment definitions from one model to another, this can be done by going to the appropriate window and saving it to a separate file. File

Extension

Description

Maxsurf Design

.msd

Contains control point and surface information. E.g. precision, flexibility, thickness, outside arrows, trimming, colour

Hydromax Design

.hmd

When opening a .msd file Hydromax looks for a .hmd file with the same name. Contains hydrostatic sections information and all Input information that may also be stored separately in the files below The .hmd file does not contain: - Maxsurf surface information - Links to or information on the Stability Criteria Library - Links to or information on the Results tables - Links to or information on the Report

Separate Input files

Extension

Description

Loadcase Compartments Damage cases All Input window tables

.hml .htk .dcs .txt

Each loadcase can be saved separately The compartment definition can be saved separately The damage case definition can be saved separately All tables in the input window can be saved as text files. Downflooding/embarkation points, margin lines, sounding pipes and modulus

Output files

Extension

Description

All Result Window tables

.txt

Result tables can be saved separately

Report

.rtf

Results tables can not be opened in Hydromax The report can be saved separately

Library

Extension

Description

Hydromax Criteria Library

.hcr

The library is not related to the Hydromax Design File, i.e. is not model related. The library is loaded when the program starts, not when the model is opened. For more information see the section on criteria.

Page 289

Appendix C

Analysis settings reference table The following table can be used as a reference to the various analysis settings for each analyses type. Analysis Settings Analyses type Trim Heel Draft DisplaceLCG TCG VCG ment Upright stability

S

Upright

R

result

n/a

n/a

For GM etc.

Large Angle Stability Equilibrium Specified Condition

S/ FTTLC result S

R

result

LC

LC

LC

LC

result S

result S

LC S / LC

S / FTT

R

result

R

Limiting KG

S / FTT

R

result

R

FTT S

Upright Upright

result n/a

R n/a

LC S / LC S/ LC4 S/ LC4 n/a n/a

LC S / LC

KN values

LC S / LC S/ FTT S/ FTT FTT n/a

Floodable Length Tank Calibration

S1 result2 S3 n/a

Where, result S R LC FTTLC FTT

Cannot be specified – they are a calculated resul Specific (fixed, single) value to be set by user Varied within Range specified by user Calculates values from loadcase – specifies displacement and COG only Free-to-trim to loadcase CG Free-to-trim to LCG calculated from a specific initial trim angle or specified LCG (and VCG) 1 The VCG is used in two ways in the KN analysis. a) The VCG only has an effect on the results if the analysis is free-to-trim. b) The GZ curve is calculated for the specified VCG and then the normalised KN curve is calculated as KN = GZ + VCG*SIN(heel).

2

The VCG is not required for the Limiting KG analysis. When calculating the LCG from a specified trim and displacement, the current VCG is used. 3

The VCG is required for the floodable length analysis because of its effect on trim. During the floodable length analysis, the trim can be substantial and the vertical separation of CG and CB needs to be taken into account. 4

The TCG may be specified directly of derived from the lost cargo / ballast water in damaged tanks from the current loadcase.

Page 290

Index

Index A About Hydromax ....................................... 200 Add Damage case ...................................... 192 Add Load ..................................................... 38 Add Surface Areas ..................................... 190 Allowable shears and moments ................... 73 Analysis Menu ...................................................... 193 Output .................................................... 144 Settings................................................... 288 Toolbar ................................................... 185 Analysis in waves ........................................ 86 Analysis type Equilibrium .............................................. 84 Floodable Length ..................................... 99 KN Values Analysis ................................. 89 Large Angle Stability ............................... 78 Limiting KG ............................................. 92 Longitudinal Strength ............................ 102 Specified Conditions ................................ 87 Tank Calibrations ................................... 104 Upright Hydrostatics ................................ 75 Animate ...................................................... 198 Arrange Icons ............................................. 199 Assembly View .......................................... 171 Automation Reference ............................... 200 B Batch Analysis ........................................... 128 Beam .......................................................... 205 Block Coefficient ....................................... 207 Boundary Box .............................................. 48 Bulkheads............................................. 74, 175 C Calibration Increment .................................. 67 Cascade ...................................................... 199 Case Menu ...................................................... 192 Cell Border ................................................. 190 Cell Shading ............................................... 190 Centre of buoyancy .................................... 171 Centre of flotation ...................................... 171 Centre of gravity ........................................ 171 Check for Updates...................................... 200 Closing a Loadcase ...................................... 38 Coefficient parameters ............................... 203 Coefficients, calculation of.......................................... 199 Hydrostatic ............................................... 32

Colour ........................................................ 191 Compartment Definition .......................47, 174 New .......................................................... 48 Saving .................................................... 150 Compartment types ...................................... 65 Compartments .......................................... 66 Linked ...................................................... 66 Linked Tanks ........................................... 66 Non-Buoyant Volumes ............................ 66 Tanks........................................................ 66 Compartments, add, delete ................................................ 48 Forming .................................................... 58 Convergence Error ..................................... 136 Coordinate system........................................ 31 Copy ....................................................147, 189 Copying Graphs ......................................... 181 Copying Tables .......................................... 147 Corrected VCG .......................................... 139 Create cases from Zone Damage ............... 193 Creating a Compartment definition file ....... 48 Creating a new Loadcase File ...................... 35 Criteria ....................................................... 194 Criteria File Format.................................... 164 Criteria Libraries ........................................ 162 Criteria, Main Import..................................................... 188 Save As .................................................. 188 Criteria, Prob Damage Import..................................................... 188 Reset to defaults ..................................... 188 Save As .................................................. 188 Curve of Areas ............................................. 80 Curves of Form ............................................ 80 Cut.............................................................. 189 D Damage .................................................68, 144 Damage Case Add........................................................... 68 Delete ....................................................... 68 Display ..................................................... 69 Extent of damage ..................................... 70 Rename .................................................... 68 saving ..................................................... 149 Select........................................................ 69 Damage Window ....................................... 173 Data Format ........................................175, 195 Data layout ................................................. 176 Data Menu.................................................. 199 Delete Cells ................................................ 189 Page 291

Index

Delete Damage case ................................... 192 Density ............................................... 140, 194 Design Grid ................................................ 199 Design Grid Toolbar .......................... 185, 186 Design Preparation ....................................... 17 Design, coherence ................................................. 19 Saving .................................................... 149 Displacement...................................... 135, 193 Display Menu ............................................. 195 Downflooding Angles .................................. 83 Downflooding points ........................... 71, 175 Linking to tanks or compartments ........... 72 Draft ......................................76, 134, 193, 206 DWL ............................................................ 76 DXF export ................................................ 150 Dynamic Stability ........................................ 79 E Edge Visibility Toolbar.............................. 186 Edit Damage case....................................... 192 Edit Loadcase ............................................. 192 Edit Menu .................................................. 189 Edit Toolbar ............................................... 184 Edit, Add......................................................... 190 Delete ..................................................... 190 Move Items Down.................................. 190 Move Items Up ...................................... 190 Sort Items ............................................... 190 Emergence Angles ....................................... 83 Equilibrium .............................................. 9, 84 Equilibrium Condition ................................... 9 Export......................................................... 188 Export Bitmap ............................................ 188 Exporting ................................................... 150 Extent of Damage ...................................... 192 External Tanks ............................................. 52 Extra Buttons Toolbar ................................ 186

Floodable Length Criteria dialog ............... 194 Flooding ....................................................... 69 Fluid analysis method ................................ 138 Fluid VCG.............................................47, 140 Fluids ......................................................... 193 Font ............................................................ 191 Form parameters ........................................ 201 Frame of Reference .........................17, 32, 199 Free Surface Moment ............................47, 139 Freeboard ..................................................... 85 Full Screen ................................................. 192 G Graph ......................................................... 200 Curve of Areas ....................................... 179 Curves of Form ...................................... 179 Data interpolation................................... 179 double click ............................................ 180 get data ................................................... 180 Righting Lever (GZ) .............................. 179 Type ....................................................... 179 Graph colours ............................................. 180 Graph Formatting ....................................... 180 Graph Printing to Scale .............................. 148 Graph Window ........................................... 178 Graphs ........................................................ 179 Grid ............................................................ 198 Grounding ...........................................143, 194 GZ .................................................................. 8 H Heel .....................................................131, 193 Heeling Moments ....................................... 225 Help Menu ................................................. 200 Home View .........................................171, 191 Horizontal lever ........................................... 39 Hull Sections Recalculate ............................................. 194 Hydromax v8.0 file .................................... 188

F

I

File Extension Table .................................. 287 File Menu ................................................... 187 File Toolbar................................................ 184 File, Close ...................................................... 187 Exit ......................................................... 189 Hydromax Version 8.0 ........................... 151 New ........................................................ 187 Open ................................................. 20, 187 Save ........................................................ 187 Save As .................................................. 187 Fill Down ................................................... 189 Floodable Length ......................................... 12

Immersion .................................................. 210 Immersion Angles ........................................ 83 Import......................................................... 187 Individual Loadcase ................................... 198 Initial Conditions ......................................... 31 Input ........................................................... 200 Input Tables, saving ................................... 150 Input Window ............................................ 174 Insert New Table ........................................ 189 Insert Row .................................................. 189 Installing Hydromax .................................... 15 ISO 12217-1 ............................................... 282

Page 292

Index

K Key points ............................................ 71, 175 adding....................................................... 71 Data .......................................................... 83 deleting..................................................... 72 editing ...................................................... 72 Results .................................................... 176 KN Values.............................................. 10, 89 L Large Angle Stability ......................... 8, 78, 80 lateral projected area .................................. 224 LCB, LCG .................................................. 208 Length ........................................................ 204 Libraries ..................................................... 162 Limiting KG ........................................... 11, 92 Linked negative compartments .................... 54 Loadcase .............................................. 34, 200 Adding and Deleting loads....................... 38 Distributed loads ...................................... 41 Editing loads ............................................ 38 Free surface correction ............................. 47 maximum number .................................... 38 Renaming ................................................. 37 saving ..................................................... 149 Update ...................................................... 43 Loadcase Colour Formatting........................ 40 Loadcase Formatting.................................... 39 Blank lines ............................................... 39 Grouping tanks ......................................... 40 Headings lines .......................................... 39 Totals ....................................................... 40 Loadcase Sorting.......................................... 39 Loadcase Template ...................................... 36 Loadcase Window...................................... 173 Loadcase, cross referencing ......................... 43 Loadcase, density ......................................... 45 Loadcase, Distributed Loads ........................ 41 Loadcase, formatting, column selection ...... 40 Loadcase, max. number ............................. 193 Loadcase, Tank loads ................................... 42 Loadgroup .............................................. 34, 43 Loadgroup, Workshop structure .................. 47 Loading a Saved Loadcase........................... 37 Longitudinal Strength .......................... 13, 102 M Margin Line points............................... 73, 175 Margin Line, Snap to hull .......................... 194 Max. Area Section ..................................... 207 Maximum deck inclination ........................ 209 Maximum shears and moments ................... 73 Measurement reference frames .................. 201

Menus......................................................... 187 Merge Cells ................................................ 189 Midship Section ......................................... 207 Modulus points .......................................... 175 Modulus Window ........................................ 73 Moment to trim .......................................... 210 MSC.19(58) ............................................... 107 MSC.216(82) ............................................. 107 N Non-Buoyant Volume Definition ................ 47 O Online Support ........................................... 200 Outside arrows ............................................. 18 overlap ......................................................... 55 P Page Setup.................................................. 188 Pan ......................................................171, 191 Paste ........................................................... 189 Permeability ............................13, 54, 135, 193 Perspective view ........................................ 172 Precision, surface ......................................... 21 Preferences ............................................15, 190 Print............................................................ 189 Print Preview.............................................. 148 Printing....................................................... 148 Printing to scale ......................................... 148 Prismatic Coefficient ................................. 208 Prob damage zones .................................... 197 Probabilistic Damage ............................14, 107 Probabilistic Damage – Analysis ............... 126 Probabilistic Damage – Inputs ................... 110 Probabilistic Damage – log file.................. 108 Probabilistic Damage – Principles ............. 107 Probabilistic Damage – Saving input parameters .............................................. 110 Properties ................................................... 192 Property Sheet ............................................ 171 R Ratio of equilibrium angles – GZ area derived heeling arm ............................................ 269 Reference Calculations .............................. 212 Reference Designs ..................................... 211 Relative Density ....................................56, 140 Render ........................................................ 198 Render Transparent .................................... 198 Report Toolbar ........................................... 186 Report Window .......................................... 181 Keystrokes ............................................. 183 Reporting ................................................... 145 Results........................................................ 200 Page 293

Index

Results Window ......................................... 175 Results, saving ........................................... 150 Resume Analysis................................ 128, 195 Righting Moment ....................................... 210 Rotate ......................................................... 191 Row Positioning ......................................... 189 S Safe steady heeling angles ........................... 80 Save ............................................................ 150 Saving Densities......................................... 141 Section Area Coefficient ............................ 208 Section, show single................................... 198 Sectional Area Curve ................................... 30 Sections, Forming ........................................ 26 Select All.................................................... 189 Select View from Data ....................... 148, 197 Set Analysis Type ...................................... 195 Set Home View .......................................... 191 Set Vessel to DWL..................................... 197 Shift Key ...................................................... 15 Show Grid .................................................. 190 Show single hull section .............................. 29 Shrink ................................................. 171, 191 Simulate fluid movement ........................... 140 Skin Thickness ............................................. 18 Sounding Pipes..................................... 66, 174 Calibration Increment .............................. 67 Edit ........................................................... 66 Specific Gravity ................................... 56, 140 Specified Condition ....................... 10, 87, 193 Specified Conditions, dialog ...................... 135 Split Cell .................................................... 189 Spool to Report .......................................... 195 Stability booklet ......................................... 139 Stability criteria............................................ 74 Stability Criteria Results ............................ 177 Stability criteria, angle calculators ............. 216 Stability criteria, Angle of deck edge immersion .............................................. 234 Stability criteria, Angle of downflooding .. 233 Stability criteria, Angle of equilibrium ...... 232 Stability criteria, Angle of equilibrium general heeling arm ........................ 250, 251 Stability criteria, Angle of equilibrium - GZ derived wind heeling arm....................... 268 Stability criteria, Angle of equilibrium - highspeed turn heeling arm ........................... 272 Stability criteria, Angle of equilibrium multiple heeling arms ............................. 258 Stability criteria, Angle of equilibrium passenger crowding heeling arm ............ 272 Stability criteria, Angle of margin line immersion .............................................. 233 Page 294

Stability criteria, Angle of maximum GZ .. 232 Stability criteria, Angle of maximum GZ above heeling arm .................................. 250 Stability criteria, Angle of vanishing stability ............................................................... 234 Stability criteria, Angle of vanishing stability general heeling arm ................................ 251 Stability criteria, Areas and levers ............. 224 Stability criteria, capsizing moment........... 275 Stability criteria, check boxes .................... 161 Stability criteria, Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) - general cos+sin heeling arm ............................................................... 272 Stability criteria, Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) - general heeling arm ........ 263 Stability criteria, Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) - high-speed turn ............... 272 Stability criteria, Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) - lifting weight .................. 273 Stability criteria, Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) - passenger crowding ........ 272 Stability criteria, Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) - towing............................. 273 Stability criteria, Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 2) - general wind heeling arm 264 Stability criteria, Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 2) - wind heeling arm ............ 273 Stability criteria, copying criteria .............. 160 Stability criteria, criteria library file .......... 162 Stability criteria, damage and intact settings ............................................................... 162 Stability criteria, defining custom criteria.. 160 Stability criteria, equilibrium ..................... 226 Stability criteria, General cos+sin heeling arm ............................................................... 219 Stability criteria, General heeling arm ....... 218 Stability criteria, glossary .......................... 169 Stability criteria, Gust ratio ........................ 218 Stability criteria, GZ area between limits type 1 - general heeling arm .......................... 253 Stability criteria, GZ area between limits type 1 - multiple heeling arms ....................... 259 Stability criteria, GZ area between limits type 1 - standard............................................. 234 Stability criteria, GZ area between limits type 2 - general heeling arm .......................... 253 Stability criteria, GZ area between limits type 2 - multiple heeling arms ....................... 259 Stability criteria, GZ area between limits type 2- HSC monohull type ........................... 235 Stability criteria, GZ area between limits type 3 - HSC multihull type ........................... 237

Index

Stability criteria, GZ area derived heeling arm type 1...................................................... 266 Stability criteria, GZ area derived heeling arm type 2...................................................... 267 Stability criteria, GZ curve features ........... 166 Stability criteria, GZ definitions ................ 168 Stability criteria, GZ derived heeling arm . 266 Stability criteria, GZ, non-healing arm ...... 228 Stability criteria, heeling arm definition .... 218 Stability criteria, heeling arm dependency on displacement .......................................... 224 Stability criteria, heeling arm units ............ 277 Stability criteria, Heeling due to arbitrary forces ...................................................... 223 Stability criteria, Heeling due to bollard-pull ............................................................... 223 Stability criteria, Heeling due to lifting of weights ................................................... 222 Stability criteria, Heeling due to passenger crowding ................................................ 220 Stability criteria, Heeling due to towing .... 223 Stability criteria, Heeling due to trawling .. 224 Stability criteria, Heeling due to turning .... 221 Stability criteria, Heeling due to wind ....... 220 Stability criteria, IMO Code on Intact Stability A.749(18) ............................................... 277 Stability criteria, IMO HSC Code MSC.36(63 ............................................................... 279 Stability criteria, IMO roll back angle calculator ................................................ 217 Stability criteria, importing ................ 162, 163 Stability criteria, ISO 12217 ...................... 284 Stability criteria, list ................................... 153 Stability criteria, Maximum Freeboard at equilibrium ............................................. 227 Stability criteria, Maximum ratio of GZ to heeling arm............................................. 247 Stability criteria, Maximum value of heel, pitch or slope at equilibrium .................. 227 Stability criteria, Minimum Freeboard at equilibrium ............................................. 227 Stability criteria, Minimum ratio of GZ to heeling arm............................................. 250 Stability criteria, moving criteria ............... 160 Stability criteria, Other criteria - STIX ...... 270 Stability criteria, parent criteria ......... 155, 226 Stability criteria, pass/fail test .................... 162 Stability criteria, Range of positive stability ............................................................... 234 Stability criteria, Range of positive stability general heeling arm ................................ 252 Stability criteria, Ratio of areas type 1 general cos+sin heeling arm................... 272

Stability criteria, Ratio of areas type 1 general heeling arm ................................ 254 Stability criteria, Ratio of areas type 1 multiple heeling arms ............................. 260 Stability criteria, Ratio of areas type 2 general heeling arm ................................ 255 Stability criteria, Ratio of areas type 3 general heeling arm ................................ 256 Stability criteria, Ratio of GMT and heeling arm ......................................................... 245 Stability criteria, Ratio of GZ area between limits ...................................................... 239 Stability criteria, Ratio of GZ values at phi1 and phi2.................................................. 231 Stability criteria, Ratio of GZ values at phi1 and phi2 - general heeling arm............... 250 Stability criteria, Ratio of GZ values at phi1 and phi2 - multiple heeling arms ........... 257 Stability criteria, Ratio of positive to negative GZ area between limits .......................... 241 Stability criteria, report and batch processing ............................................................... 166 Stability criteria, results ............................. 164 Stability criteria, saving ............................. 163 Stability criteria, selecting for analysis ...... 160 Stability criteria, Subdivision Index s-factor MSC 19(58 ............................................. 244 Stability criteria, Survivability Index MSC_216(82) ........................................ 261 Stability criteria, tree list ............................ 159 Stability criteria, User Defined Heeling Arm ............................................................... 219 Stability criteria, USL code........................ 281 Stability criteria, Value of GMt at ............. 228 Stability criteria, Value of GMt at equilibrium - general heeling arm ............................. 245 Stability criteria, Value of GMt or GMl at equilibrium ............................................. 227 Stability criteria, Value of GZ at ................ 228 Stability criteria, Value of GZ at equilibrium general heeling arm ................................ 246 Stability criteria, Value of GZ at specified angle or maximum GZ below specified angle ....................................................... 229 Stability criteria, Value of maximum GZ .. 228 Stability criteria, Value of maximum GZ above heeling arm .................................. 247 Stability criteria, Value of RM at specified angle or maximum RM below specified angle ....................................................... 230 Start Analysis ......................................127, 195 Start Batch Analysis................................... 195 Starting Hydromax ....................................... 15

Page 295

Index

Status Bar ................................................... 192 Stop Analysis ..................................... 128, 195 Streaming results to Word ......................... 145 Surface Use .................................................. 17 T Table .......................................................... 189 Tank adding, deleting ........................................ 48 Fluids ....................................................... 56 Ordering ................................................... 57 Permeability ....................................... 54, 56 Saving .................................................... 150 Surface Thickness .................................... 57 Visibility .................................................. 57 Tank Calibrations ................................. 13, 104 Tank Type external..................................................... 52 linked ....................................................... 50 simple ....................................................... 48 tapered ...................................................... 49 tanks overlap ..................................................... 55 Tanks Recalculate ............................................. 194 Tanks within Compartments ........................ 54 Tanks, boundary surfaces .................................... 50 complex .................................................... 50 Non-Buoyant Areas ................................. 52 Recalculate ............................................. 185 TCG, Limiting KG, KN ............................. 134 Tile Horizontal ........................................... 199 Tile Vertical ............................................... 199 Tolerances .................................................. 136 Toolbars ............................................. 184, 192 Trapezoidal integration ................................ 26 Trim ................................................... 132, 193 Fixed ...................................................... 133 Free-to-trim to a specified LCG value ... 134 Free-to-trim using a specified initial trim value ................................................... 133 Trim angle .................................................. 209 Trimmed surfaces, checking ........................ 18 U Undo........................................................... 189 Units ..................................................... 33, 199 Update Loadcase ........................................ 194 Upright Hydrostatics ................................ 7, 75 V Validate Hydromax model ........................... 29 VCG for trim balance................................. 134 Page 296

View (extended)Toolbar ............................ 186 View Direction ........................................... 199 View Menu ................................................ 190 View Toolbar ............................................. 184 View Window ............................................ 171 Visibility .................................................... 197 Visibility Toolbar ................................185, 186 W Waterplane Area Coefficient ..................... 208 Wave definition.......................................... 142 Wave height ............................................... 142 Waveform .................................................. 194 sinusoidal ............................................... 142 trochoidal ............................................... 142 Wavelength ................................................ 142 Wetted surface area, integration of ............ 211 Window Menu ........................................... 199 Window Toolbar ........................................ 185 Windows Registry........................................ 15 Word, report streaming to .......................... 145 Word, report templates............................... 145 Z Zero Point .........................................17, 32, 39 Zoom ...................................................171, 190

HMManual

Recommend Documents